Product Description: Optix Osn 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Product Description
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching

System
V100R009
Issue
01
Date
2009-01-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Commercial in Confidence
Page 2 of 223
OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Product Description
About This Document

Author
Prepared by
Date
Reviewed by
Date
Approved by
Date
Summary
This document includes:
Chapter
Description
1 Network Application
Describes the OptiX OSN 7500 and its position in the

network.
2 Function
This chapter generally describes the features of the

OptiX OSN 7500 in the terms of capacity, interface,
boards, OAM and other functions.
3 Hardware
Describes the mechanical structure and the

adaptable cabinet installation of the OptiX OSN
7500.
4 Software Architecture
Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN

7500. It includes intelligent software, board software,
NE software and NM software.
5 Data Features
Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of

the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of function, application
and protection.
6 ASON Features
This chapter introduces the ASON features of the

OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of service classes and
application.
7 Protection
Describes protection modes (including equipment

level and network level) and characteristics
supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 3 of 223

Product Description
8 OAM
This chapter describes main technical characteristics

of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of maintenance and
centralized management.
9 Security Management
This chapter describes main technical characteristics

of the OptiX OSN 7500 in terms of safe operation.
10 Technical Specifications
This chapter describes the hardware dimension,

interface specifications, transmission performance,
environment requirements and power specification
for the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.8 Power Consumption

and Weight of Each Board
This appendix lists the power consumption and

weight of the boards that are configured on the OptiX
OSN 7500.
11 Compliant Standards
This appendix lists international standards to which

the OptiX OSN 7500 conforms in terms of design and
performance.
12 Glossary
This appendix lists the terms used in this document.
13 Acronyms and
Abbreviations
The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations

used in this document.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 4 of 223

Product Description
History
Issue
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Details
Date
Author
Approved by
Page 5 of 223

Product Description
Contents
1 Network Application......................................................................................................11
2 Function ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Capacity .......................................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity ........................................................................................................ 14
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity ............................................................................................................... 15
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity.............................................................................................................. 16
2.2 Service ............................................................................................................................................ 17
2.2.1 Service Type .......................................................................................................................... 17
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................ 18
2.3 Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 19
2.3.1 Service Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 20
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces .................................................................................. 21
2.4 Networking Topology ...................................................................................................................... 21
2.5 Protection........................................................................................................................................ 23
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection ................................................................................................... 24
2.5.2 Network Level Protection ....................................................................................................... 24
2.6 Board REG Function....................................................................................................................... 25
2.7 ASON Features............................................................................................................................... 27
2.8 Built-in WDM Technology................................................................................................................ 27
2.9 Microwave Technology ................................................................................................................... 28
2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply ........................................................................................................... 28
2.11 Clock ............................................................................................................................................. 29
2.12 High Precise Timing...................................................................................................................... 29
2.13 OAM Information Interworking ...................................................................................................... 30
2.14 OAM.............................................................................................................................................. 31
2.14.1 Software Package Loading .................................................................................................. 32
2.14.2 Hot Patch ............................................................................................................................. 33
2.14.3 NSF Function ....................................................................................................................... 33
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement ................................................................................................ 33
2.14.5 PRBS Function..................................................................................................................... 34
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression............................................................................................ 34
2.14.7 TCM...................................................................................................................................... 35
2.14.8 ETH-OAM............................................................................................................................. 35
2.15 Security Management................................................................................................................... 36
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 6 of 223

Product Description
3 Hardware....................................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 37
3.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................ 39
3.3 Subrack........................................................................................................................................... 40
3.3.1 Structure................................................................................................................................. 41
3.3.2 Slot Allocation......................................................................................................................... 42
3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................. 44
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards ................................................................................................... 44
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards .......................................................................... 50
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 51
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 56
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards ........................................................................................................ 57
3.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................... 61
3.4.7 Microwave Boards.................................................................................................................. 62
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards ........................................................................................... 62
3.4.9 Other Boards.......................................................................................................................... 63
4 Software Architecture .................................................................................................. 65

4.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 65
4.2 Communication Protocols............................................................................................................... 66
4.3 Board Software ............................................................................................................................... 66
4.4 NE Software.................................................................................................................................... 66
4.5 Network Management System........................................................................................................ 67
4.6 ASON Software............................................................................................................................... 68
5 Data Features................................................................................................................ 70
5.1 Ethernet Features ........................................................................................................................... 70
5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 70
5.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 81
5.1.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................... 85
5.2 RPR Features ................................................................................................................................. 86
5.2.2 Functions................................................................................................................................ 88
5.2.3 Application.............................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.4 Protection ............................................................................................................................... 93
5.3 ATM Features.................................................................................................................................. 94
5.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................................ 94
5.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 97
5.3.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 100
5.4 DDN Features ............................................................................................................................... 100
5.4.1 Functions.............................................................................................................................. 101
5.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................ 101
5.4.3 Protection ............................................................................................................................. 102
5.5 SAN Features ............................................................................................................................... 103
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 7 of 223

Product Description
6 ASON Features ........................................................................................................... 104

6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies ......................................................................................... 104
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links........................................................................................... 104
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links .................................................................................................. 106
6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration ................................................................................................ 106
6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration .............................................................................. 107
6.4 ASON Clock Tracing ..................................................................................................................... 108
6.5 SLA ............................................................................................................................................... 111
6.6 Diamond Services......................................................................................................................... 113
6.7 Gold Services ............................................................................................................................... 117
6.8 Silver Services .............................................................................................................................. 119
6.9 Copper Services ........................................................................................................................... 121
6.10 Iron Services ............................................................................................................................... 122
6.11 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................ 123
6.12 Service Association..................................................................................................................... 126
6.13 Service Optimization................................................................................................................... 127
6.14 Service Migration ........................................................................................................................ 127
6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................ 128
6.16 Preset Restoring Trail ................................................................................................................. 128
6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail ................................................................................................... 128
6.18 Shared Risk Link Group.............................................................................................................. 130
6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS ............................................................................................ 130
7 Protection ................................................................................................................... 132

7.1 Equipment Level Protection.......................................................................................................... 132
7.1.1 TPS Protection ..................................................................................................................... 133
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units ................................................... 134
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit ........................................................................................ 134
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards ..................................................................................... 135
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards ............................................................................................ 136
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards ................................................................................... 137
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit ...................................................................... 138
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit ................................................................... 138
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans..................................................................................................................... 139
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply ........................................................... 139
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions ................................................... 139
7.2 Network Level Protection.............................................................................................................. 140
7.2.1 Linear MSP .......................................................................................................................... 141
7.2.2 MSP Ring ............................................................................................................................. 141
7.2.3 SNCP ................................................................................................................................... 142
7.2.4 DNI ....................................................................................................................................... 146
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection.................................................................................... 147
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 8 of 223

Product Description
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP.................................................................................................... 147
7.2.7 RPR Protection .................................................................................................................... 149
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection................................................................................................ 150
8 OAM............................................................................................................................. 152
8.1 Operation and Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 152
8.2 Network Management................................................................................................................... 154
9 Security Management ................................................................................................ 155

9.1 Authentication Management ......................................................................................................... 155
9.2 Authorization Management ........................................................................................................... 155
9.3 Network Security Management..................................................................................................... 156
9.4 System Security Management...................................................................................................... 156
9.5 Log Management.......................................................................................................................... 157
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management ............................................................................................. 157
9.5.2 Syslog Management ............................................................................................................ 157
10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 159

10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment ..................................................................................... 159
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet.............................................................................................. 160
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack............................................................................................. 160
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters ................................................................................................. 161
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering ........................................................................................................... 161
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class ............................................................................................................. 162
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance ......................................................................... 162
10.1.7 Transmission Performance ................................................................................................ 163
10.1.8 Protection Performance ..................................................................................................... 163
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility............................................................................................ 165
10.1.10 Environmental Specification............................................................................................. 166
10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces ......................................................................... 167
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168
10.2.2 STM-4 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 168
10.2.3 STM-16 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 169
10.2.4 STM-64 Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 171
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................. 173
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation........................................................................................................ 174
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces ................................................................................................ 175
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces ....................................................................................................... 176
10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces...................................................................... 177
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces ................................................................................................... 178
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces................................................................................................... 178
10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces ....................................................................... 179
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications ............................................................................................ 179
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications........................................................................................ 180
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 9 of 223

Product Description
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180
10.4.4 RS-422 Interface Specifications......................................................................................... 180
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications.......................................................................... 181
10.5 Microwave RF Performance ....................................................................................................... 181
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes............................................................................................................. 182
10.5.2 Frequency Band................................................................................................................. 183
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 184
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance................................................................................................... 186
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance.................................................................................... 189
10.5.6 IF Performance .................................................................................................................. 190
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem ................................................ 190
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability ......................................................................................................... 190
10.6 Safety Certification...................................................................................................................... 191
10.7 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................................... 192
10.7.1 Environment for Storage .................................................................................................... 192
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation.......................................................................................... 194
10.7.3 Environment for Operation................................................................................................. 197
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board ........................................................................ 199
11 Compliant Standards ............................................................................................... 203

11.1 ITU-T Recommendations ............................................................................................................ 203
11.2 IEEE Standards........................................................................................................................... 205
11.3 IETF Standards ........................................................................................................................... 206
11.4 ANSI Standards........................................................................................................................... 207
11.5 Environment Related Standards ................................................................................................. 207
11.6 EMC Standards ........................................................................................................................... 208
11.7 Safety Compliance Standards..................................................................................................... 208
11.8 Protection Standards................................................................................................................... 209
11.9 ASON Standards ......................................................................................................................... 209
11.10 Microwave Standards................................................................................................................ 210
12 Glossary.................................................................................................................... 213
13 Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................. 219
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 10 of 223

Product Description
Network Application
This chapter describes the position and application of the OptiX OSN 7500 intelligent
optical switching system (the OptiX OSN 7500) in an optical transmission network.
The OptiX OSN 7500 is the optical core switching (OCS) equipment. It is a next
generation equipment that Huawei has developed based on the type of metropolitan
area network (MAN) and its development trend in the future.
As an intelligent optical core switching system with large capacity, the OptiX OSN
7500 is mainly used at the backbone layer of the MAN to groom and transmit various
services with different granularities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 has 360 Gbit/s higher order and 80 Gbit/s lower order
cross-connect capacities, and features large switching capacity.
The OptiX OSN 7500 integrates the following technologies:
l
Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)
Ethernet
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)
Storage area network (SAN)
Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)
Digital data network (DDN)
Automatically switched optical network (ASON)
Microwave Technology
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 11 of 223

Product Description
Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500
As a system used at a higher layer, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be networked with the
following equipment to provide a complete MAN solution:
l
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
OptiX OSN 1500
Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 7500 in a transmission network.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 12 of 223

Product Description
Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 9500
OptiX OSN 7500

Backbone
layer
OptiX OSN 3500 II
OptiX OSN 3500T
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
Convergence
layer
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
Access
layer
GSM/CDMA/
WCDMA/TDSCDMA
PSTN
Ethernet
...
ATM
SAN
Microwave
Technology
Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)

Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WDMA)
Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA)
Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)
Storage Area Network (SAN)
Ethernet
Microwave Technology
As an intelligent multiservice switching and transmission system, the OptiX OSN 7500
can be used as follows:
l
A core convergence node for a large city
An optical core switching (OCS) system for a medium or small city
A service grooming node on a provincial trunk
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 13 of 223

Product Description
Function
2.1 Capacity
The capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and slot access capacity.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity
Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity
The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX
OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by
different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity
The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity

Different cross-connect boards have different cross-connect capacities.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following cross-connect boards: T1GXCSA,
T1EXCSA, T2UXCSA, T1SXCSA and T1IXCSA. Table 2-1 lists their cross-connect
capacities.
Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity
Board
Higher-Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access
Capacity of
Single
Subrack
T1GXCSA
240 Gbit/s (1536 x

1536 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4),

equivalent to (8064 x 8064
VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s
(1280 x
1280 VC-4)
T1EXCSAa
240 Gbit/s (1536 x

1536 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4),

VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
200 Gbit/s
(1280 x
1280 VC-4)
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 14 of 223

Product Description
Board
Higher-Order
Cross-Connect
Capacity
Lower-Order Cross-Connect
Capacity
Access
Capacity of
Single
Subrack
T2UXCSA
360 Gbit/s (2304 x

2304 VC-4)
20 Gbit/s (128 x 128 VC-4)

VC-12) or (384 x 384 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
T1SXCSA
360 Gbit/s (2304 x

2304 VC-4)
40 Gbit/s (256 x 256 VC-4)

VC-12) or (768 x 768 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
T1IXCSA
360 Gbit/s (2304 x

2304 VC-4)
80 Gbit/s (512 x 512 VC-4)

equivalent to (3225632256
VC-12) or (15361536 VC-3)
280 Gbit/s
(1792 x
1792 VC-4)
a: The T1EXCSA board cannot be used with any line board of the N2 series (except
the N2SLQ16). As the T2SL64 board is no longer manufactured, it can be replaced
by the T2SL64A board, without affecting the services. It is recommended to use the
T1EXCSA board with the T2SL64A board.
2.1.2 Microwave Capacity

The number of IFSD1 boards that can be configured for different types of the OptiX
OSN equipment is different. Hence, the number of microwave directions supported by
different types of the OptiX OSN equipment is also different.
Table 2-2 lists the maximum number of IF boards and the maximum number of
microwave directions supported by different types of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 2-2 Microwave capacity of the OptiX OSN equipment
Equipment Type
Maximum Number of
Configured IF Boards
Maximum Supported
Microwave Capacity
(Channel)
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
OptiX OSN 2500
10
OptiX OSN 3500
10
20
OptiX OSN
3500T(19inch)
10
20
OptiX OSN 3500II
10
20
OptiX OSN 7500
15
30
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 15 of 223

Product Description
2.1.3 Slot Access Capacity

The slot access capacity varies according to the cross-connect boards.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 22 service slots. The maximum access capacity varies
according to the cross-connect and timing boards installed.
Figure 2-1 shows the access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA
is used.
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
EOW
GSCC(B)
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
S SLOT S
32
L
L
O
O
T
T
3
3
1
4
SLOT
33
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
AUX
S
L
O
T
2
PIU(A)
S
L
O
T
2
PIU(B)
S
L
O
T
2
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
GSCC(A)
Figure 2-1 Access capacity of service slots when the T1GXCSA/T1EXCSA is used
Fiber routing
T
1
T
2
T
3
T
4
T
5
T
6
T
7
T
8
T
9
5 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
GXCSA(A) /
EXCSA(A)
Fiber routing
A : Active
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S S
L L
O O
T T
1 1
7 8
5 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
FANA
GXCSA(B) /
EXCSA(B)
S
L
O
5 Gbit/s
S
L
O
10 Gbit/s
FANA
5 Gbit/s
FANA
Fiber routing
B : Standby
Figure 2-2 shows the access capacity of service slots when the
T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is used.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 16 of 223

Product Description
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S SLOT S
32
L
L
O
O
T
T
3
3
1
4
SLOT
33
10 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
AUX
PIU(B)
PIU(A)
S
L
O
T
2
4
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
2
3
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
2
2
GSCC(B)
S
L
O
T
2
1
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
2
0
EOW
S
L
O
T
1
9
GSCC(A)
Figure 2-2 Access capacity of service slots when the T2UXCSA/T1SXCSA/T1IXCSA is

used
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
2
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
1
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
0
10 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
A : Active
S
L
O
T
9
20 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
Fiber routing
S
L
O
T
8
FANA
20 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
7
UXCSA(B) /SXCSA(B)/
IXCSA(B)
S
L
O
T
6
20 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
5
UXCSA(A) /SXCSA(A)/
IXCSA(A)
S
L
O
T
4
10 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
3
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
2
FANA
10 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
10 Gbit/s
FANA
Fiber routing
B : Standby
2.2 Service
The supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.
2.2.1 Service Type
The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity
The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards.
2.2.1 Service Type

The OptiX OSN 7500 can process following types of services : SDH, PDH, Ethernet,
RPR, ATM, DDN and SAN services.
For details about supported service types, refer to Table 2-3.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 17 of 223

Product Description
Table 2-3 Service type supported by the OptiX OSN 7500

Service Type
Description
SDH services
Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64
Standard SDH concatenated services:

VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c
Standard SDH virtual concatenation services: VC4-Xv

(X8), VC3-Xv (X24)
SDH services with FEC: 10.709 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s
E1/T1 service
E3/T3 service
E4 service
PDH services
NOTE
With the E13/M13 function, the equipment can perform multiplexing
and demultiplexing between E1/T1 signals and E3/T3 signals.
Ethernet services
RPR services
ATM services
DDN services
SAN services
Ethernet private line (EPL) service
Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service
EVPL service
EVPLAN service
Constant bit rate (CBR) service
Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service
Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service
Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service
N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service
Framed E1 service
Fiber channel (FC) service
Fiber connection (FICON) service
Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service
Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface

(DVB-ASI) service
2.2.2 Service Access Capacity

The capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 7500 can access varies according to the
type and quantity of the configured boards.
Table 2-4 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500 for accessing different
services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 18 of 223

Product Description
Table 2-4 Service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 7500

Service Type
Maximum Number of Services

Supported by a Single Subrack
STM-64 standard or concatenated

service
28
STM-64 (FEC) service
17

service
112
STM-16 (FEC) service
22

service
88
STM-1 standard service
280
STM-1 (electrical) service
66
E4 service
16
E3/T3 service
102
E1/T1 service
252
N x 64 kbit/s service (N: 131)
32
Framed E1 service
32
FE service
208
GE service
88
10GE service
44
STM-1 ATM service
88
STM-4 ATM service
22
ESCON service
88
FICON/FC100 service
44
FC200 service
22
DVB-ASI service
88
2.3 Interface
The interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces
Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 19 of 223

Product Description
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
2.3.1 Service Interfaces

Service interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.
Table 2-5 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-5 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface
Description
SDH service
interface
STM-1 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors

STM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2
STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2,
L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je
STM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f
STM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b,
Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b
STM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e
STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T
G.692 can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0
THz, and can output fixed wavelength and can be directly
interconnected with the WDM equipment.
PDH service
interface
75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors

100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors
75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: SMB connectors
Ethernet service
interface
10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,

1000Base-ZX, 10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
DDN service
interface
Framed E1
ATM service
interface
STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2
RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21
STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2

E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the
N1PD3 or N1PL3 or N1PL3A board
IMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1
or N1PQM or N1PQMA or N2PQ1 board
Storage area
network (SAN)
service interface
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical

interfaces
Page 20 of 223

Product Description
Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2
are technical specifications defined by Huawei.
2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces

The equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.
Table 2-6 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-6 Administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN 7500
Interface
Type
Description
Administration
interface
One remote maintenance interface (OAM)

Four broadcast data interfaces (S1S4)
One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)
One Ethernet interface (10M/100M) for network management
(ETH)
One administration serial interface (F&f)
One commissioning interface (COM)
Orderwire
interface
One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)

Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2)
Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (S1 and S2, used with two
broadcast data interfaces)
Clock
interface
Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)
External synchronization and synchronous output
Alarm
interface
16-input and 4-output alarm interface

Four cabinet alarm indicator output interfaces
Four cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfaces
Four cabinet alarm concatenation input interface
Microwave IF
interface
One coaxial cable connects to one ODU. Each board provides two
cables to separately connect two ODUs.
Two -48 VDC power input interfaces.
2.4 Networking Topology

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the topologies such as chain, ring, tangent rings,
intersecting rings, ring with chain, dual node interconnection (DNI), hub, and mesh at
the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64 level.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 21 of 223

Product Description
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the separate and hybrid configuration of the following
types of NEs:
l
Terminal multiplexer (TM)
Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)
Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)
The OptiX OSN 7500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro
equipment series, to provide a complete transmission network solution.
When the equipment is interconnecting, make sure that the K bytes to be received and
transmitted are on the same path at both ends.
l
The OptiX OSN 7500 can be used with another OptiX OSN equipment to provide
a complete ASON solution. This solution covers all the layers including the
backbone layer, the convergence layer, and the access layer.
Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX OSN 7500 can be

interconnected with the WDM equipment.
Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 7500
can be interconnected with the OptiX Metro equipment.
Table 2-7 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 2-7 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
Networking Mode
Topology
Chain
Ring
Tangent
rings
Intersecting
rings
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 22 of 223

Product Description
Networking Mode
5
Ring with
chain
DNI
Hub
Mesh
Legends:
MADM
Topology
ADM
TM
ASON NE
2.5 Protection
The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 23 of 223

Product Description
2.5.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
2.5.1 Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.
Table 2-8 lists the equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 2-8 Equipment level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Item
Protection Scheme
PDH
TPS
DDN
TPS
Ethernet processing unit
TPS/PPS/BPS/DLAG/1+1 hot backup
ATM
1+1 hot backup
Protection for the Microwave unit
1+1 HSB/FD/SD and N+1 hot backup
Arbitrary bit rate wavelength

conversion unit
Intra-board protection (dual-fed and selective

receiving) and inter-board protection (N+1
protection)
Cross-connect and timing unit
1+1 hot backup
SCC unit
1+1 hot backup
power interface unit
1+1 hot backup
Intelligent Fans unit
The power supply modules are of mutual

backup for the three fan modules.
Board Under Abnormal

Conditions
Power-Down Protection During Software

Loading, Overvoltage or Undervoltage
Protection for Power Supply and Board
Temperature Detection
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the coexistence of two different types of TPS protection groups.
2.5.2 Network Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several network level protection schemes.
Table 2-9 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 24 of 223

Product Description
Table 2-9 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Network Level Protection
Protection Scheme
SDH protection
Linear MSP
MSP ring
Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP),
subnetwork connection multi-protection (SNCMP) and
subnetwork connection tunnel protection (SNCTP)
Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection
Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
Optical-path-shared MSP
Ethernet protection
Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection
ATM protection
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
2.6 Board REG Function

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of REG and ADM. See Figure
2-3.
Figure 2-3 Hybrid application of ADM and REG
REG
SL64
SL64
IN
OUT
IN
OU T
SL64
IN
OU T
IN
OUT
SL64
OptiX OSN 7500

IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
IN
OUT
SL16
SL16
SL16
SL16
ADM
For details on the boards that support REG, see Table 2-10.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 25 of 223

Product Description
Table 2-10 Boards that supports the REG

Board
Valid Slots When the

Cross-Connect
Capacity Is 240 Gbit/s
Valid Slots When the

Cross-Connect
Capacity is 360 Gbit/s
Function
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and

26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and

26-31
N1SL64
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and

26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and

26-31
N2SL16,
N3SL16
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and

26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and

26-31
N2SL16A
Slots 3-8, 11-16, and

26-31
Slots 1-8, 11-18, and

26-31
With the REG

function enabled,
the board is in the
RS loopback mode
and only processes
the regeneration
section overhead
and the frame
header.
N3SLN
slot 3-8, 11-16, and

26-31
slot 1-8, 11-18, and

26-31
N1SF64,
N1SF64A
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and

26-31
Slots 4-8, 11-16, and

26-31
With the REG

function enabled,
the board is in the
RS loopback mode
and only processes
the regeneration
section overhead,
the frame header
and FEC overhead.
NOTE
If the line boards are the N3SLN series, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the REG function only
when N is 16.
For the optical interfaces for the REG, see Table 2-11.
Table 2-11 Optical interfaces for the REG
Board
Optical Interface Type
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SL64
I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, and V-64.2b
N1SF64
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N1SF64A
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e
N2SL16, N3SL16
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je
N2SL16A
I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, and L-16.2
N3SLN
L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, and U-16.2Je
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 26 of 223

Product Description
2.7 ASON Features

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize
the intelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.
The ASON features of the OptiX OSN 7500 are as follows:
l
Supports automatic end-to-end service configuration.
Supports service level agreement (SLA).
Supports mesh networking and protection.
Provides traffic engineering control to ensure load-balance traffic network wide

and improve the bandwidth availability.
Provides distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and

pre-configuration.
Supports span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the

scalability of the network.
Provides ASON clock tracing.

The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 7500
according to the requirement. If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX
OSN 7500 does not support the intelligent features described in this manual.
2.8 Built-in WDM Technology

The equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission
of several wavelengths in one fiber.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a built-in WDM technology. The functions of the
equipment are as follows:
l
Any four adjacent standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
can be added or dropped.
The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) or the optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
station that adds or drops four wavelengths is supported. Concatenation is
supported, and thus multiple waves can be added or dropped.
The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692

compliant standard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, all the
signals are transparently transmitted.
Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are
cascaded with other OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is
realized.
The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for

client-side uplink and downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). In the
case of these client-side signals, clock recovery is available, and the signal rate
can be monitored.
Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One
board of this type can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the
protection switching time less than 50 ms.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 27 of 223

Product Description
l
Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1
inter-board standby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time less
than 50 ms.
Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which can be multiplexed or

demultiplexed.
Supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmit signals
over a long distance.
Supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.
2.9 Microwave Technology

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the built-in microwave boards of intermediate
frequency. It can work with the outdoor unit (ODU) of the OptiX RTN 600 to achieve
wireless service transmission.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 7500, the service signals are transmitted on the basis of
the microwave transmission flow shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Processing flow of the service signals
Baseband
signal
PDH/SDH/Ethernet
Service
interface
board
Baseband
signal
Cross connect
board
IF signal
Microwave
IF board
RF signal
ODU
Antenna
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following microwave functions:

l
Software programmed radio (SPR) function. The microwave capacity and

modulation mode can be set through software.
Microwave frames based on TU and STM-1. The air interface is used for the
product to interconnect with the other OptiX OSN products that adopt the
microwave frames based on TU and STM-1 or to interconnect with the OptiX
RTN 600.
1+1 protection and N+1 protection.
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.
2.10 110 V/220 V Power Supply

The equipment supports the input of 110 V or 220 V AC power supply. When DC
power supply is not available, the equipment can still be supplied with AC power.
The OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500 supports the 110 V/220 V power supply through an
uninterrupted power modules (UPM). The UPM is used to convert 110 V/220 V AC
into 48 V DC, and to provide power supply for the OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 7500.
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply.
The output power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 28 of 223

Product Description
The dimensions of the power box are 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 130 mm (H).
2.11 Clock
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the clock functions.
l
SSM clock protocol
Tributary retiming
Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input
External clock output shutdown
Line clock source
Tributary clock source
Three working modes are as follows:
Tracing mode
Holdover mode
Free-run mode
ASON clock tracing
For the detailed information of the relevant clock, see the clock topic in the Feature
Description.
2.12 High Precise Timing

To meet the requirement of precise time synchronization between equipment, the
OptiX OSN equipment adopts the precise time synchronization technology. The time
information is accessed in the SDH network and transmitted to the equipment (such
as the 3G wireless base station) that requires precise time.
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts the precise time synchronization technology that meets
the requirements in IEEE 1588 standard. The system control and communication
board (N3GSCC) and the cross-connect board (T1IXCSA) are used to replace the
GPS. The time information is accessed through the S1 and S2 interfaces on the
T1EOW board and is carried by the line board to synchronize the time in the global
network.
The high precise timing function can be enabled only when the working and protection
cross-connect and SCC boards are upgraded and support the high precise timing
function of an NE.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the following line boards that support the time
synchronization function.
l
10 Gbit/s rate: N1SL64 and N1SLD64.
2.5 Gbit/s rate: N3SL16A, N1SLD16 and N1SLQ16.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 29 of 223

Product Description
l
155 Mbit/s rate: N1SL1A and N1SLQ1A.
The OptiX OSN 7500 contains the data processing board (namely, the N5EFS0 board)
that supports the time synchronization function.
The N5EFS0 boards supports the time synchronization function only when it works with the
N1EFF8A and N1ETF8A access boards.
2.13 OAM Information Interworking

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports OAM information interworking.
Any of the following methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 7500 to transparently
transmit the OAM information of the third-party equipment, or for the third-party
equipment to transparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 7500.
l
HWECC
IP over DCC
OSI over DCC
Table 2-12 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 2-12 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 7500
DCC Allocation
N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Channel type
Supports the D1D1, D1D3 and D4D12 channel

types.
Operation
mode
Mode 1
Mode 2
Supports 160 D1D3 channels.

Mode 3

Mode 4

Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 7

Mode 8

Mode 9

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 30 of 223

Product Description
DCC Allocation
N2GSCC/N3GSCC/N4GSCC/N5GSCC
Mode 10

Protocol type
Supports HWECC, IP, and OSI protocols.
Default mode
Mode 1
2.14 OAM
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides maintenance and management functions.The OAM of
the network can be realized by using the T2000. This topic describes the key
equipment-level OAM solutions.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and
simulation software package loading.
2.14.2 Hot Patch
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
2.14.3 NSF Function
The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet
boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the
board software and network processor (NP) software.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement
The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
2.14.5 PRBS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are
raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a
VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the
bit errors of each section.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 31 of 223

Product Description
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2

maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
2.14.1 Software Package Loading

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the functions of software package loading and
simulation software package loading.
Software Package Loading

The software package loading function supports mass loading of software at NE-level
and diffused loading of software at network-level. This function realizes upgrade and
management of NE software, simplifies the upgrade operations, and improves the
usability of the upgrade operations.
The software package loading has the following features:
l
Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
The complete software package is stored on the compact flash (CF) card of the
N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board. If the board software files are lost,
these files can be restored from the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC board.
The automatic matching and loading of software package is supported. If the

software version of the in-service board does not match the software package,
the board software is automatically updated.
The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load

the files required in the current update.
The network-level diffused loading feature realizes the synchronous software

package loading on the NEs in the entire network. These NEs are configured with
the same series of SCC boards.
The NG-SDH equipment supports the anti-mistake package loading function.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:

l
Upgrade of the NE software
Replacement of the service boards
Replacement of the auxiliary boards
Replacement of the cross-connect boards
Replacement of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards
Replacement of the CF cards of the N3GSCC or N4GSCC or N5GSCC boards
Simulation Package Loading

If a software package needs to be loaded to an NE and if the mapping relation
between the NE boards and the software is specified according to the simulation
package, you can enable the simulation package loading function to increase the
loading efficiency.
The simulation software package includes:
l
All the necessary software to be loaded to the NE
Package description document that specifies the loading attributes of each

software
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 32 of 223

Product Description
The simulation software package loading has the following features:

l
Simplifying the upgrade operation
Improving the upgrade security
Improving the upgrade efficiency
2.14.2 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hot patch technology.
Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is located
or a new requirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of
replacing old codes with new codes should be performed to rectify the defect or
realize the new requirement, without any service interruption. These new codes are
referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technology has the following features:
l
The hot patch solves most of the software problems without affecting services.
The hot patch effectively decreases the number of software versions and
prevents frequent software version upgrade.
The hot patch operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely.
The hot patch also provides a rollback function. This helps to decrease the
upgrade cost and to avoid upgrade risks.
The hot patch can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus
improves the efficiency of solving problems.
2.14.3 NSF Function

The non-interrupted service forwarding (NSF) function is supported by the Ethernet
boards. With the NSF function, services are not interrupted during an upgrade of the
board software and network processor (NP) software.
In the NSF mode, the upgrade of the board software and NP software for the N4EFS0
and N2EFS4boards can be completed after performing a warm reset of the boards. In
this case, the service interruption time is less than 50 ms, which meets the
carrier-class requirements.
If the two versions before and after the upgrade have significant differences, the
service interruption during the NSF-mode upgrade cannot be controlled within 50 ms,
and this ensures only a low service interruption time.
2.14.4 Board Version Replacement

The board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new
version board. After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new
version board are consistent with the configuration and service status of the old
version board.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 33 of 223

Product Description
This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus reduces the
equipment cost and the maintenance cost.
For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to Part
Replacement Design.
When using the board version replacement function, note the following points:
l
The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the
replacement, fully consider the difference of functions of the two boards. For
example, If the T2SL64 board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3
services, it cannot be replaced with the N1SL64 board.
The line board to be replaced cannot have an optical-path-shared MSP

configured.
2.14.5 PRBS Function

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
function.
The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that
provides the PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service
path is faulty. Such analysis can be performed for the NE and the entire network.
During deployment or troubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a
real test device.
The PRBS function has the following two types:
l
If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a tributary board.
If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is
integrated on a line board or a cross-connect board.
The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:

l
For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback
command on the T2000.
On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this
path.
The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts
the statistics.
The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.
The user queries the PRBS statistics result.
The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.
For details, refer to PRBS.
2.14.6 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are
raised as a result of the alarms on the line board.
When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board,
many alarms are raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line
board. These alarms are all reported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 34 of 223

Product Description
disturb the troubleshooting and affect the problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the
inter-board alarm suppression function is used to solve this problem.
If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE,
and if higher order alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on
the tributary/data board are suppressed.
If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at
the service source does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the
tributary/data board are not suppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the
T2000 and are not mistakenly suppressed.
2.14.7 TCM
The tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.If a
VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the
bit errors of each section.
The N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SLO1, N3SLO1, N2SL4, N3SLN, N3SLD41, N3SLQ41,
N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N3SLT1, N2SL16, N3SL16, N2SLQ16, N2SL16A and T2SL64A
boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.
2.14.8 ETH-OAM
The ETH-OAM function enhances the method of performing Ethernet Layer 2
maintenance. It can be implemented to verify service connectivity, commission
deployed services, locate network faults, and so on.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, Ethernet service processing boards provide the ETH-OAM
function, which complies with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The ETH-OAM
function provides a complete ETH-OAM solution to automatically detect and locate
faults.
The IEEE 802.1ag ETH-OAM is realized through the following methods:
l
The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.
The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.
The continuity check (CC), which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.
OAM_Ping test, which is used to test the packet loss ratio and latency in service.
The IEEE 802.3ah ETH-OAM function is realized through the following methods:
l
Automatic OAM Discovery, which is used to obtain the capability for the opposite
end to support the IEEE 802.3ah OAM protocol.
Link performance monitoring, which is used to monitor the bit error performance
of the link.
Fault detection, which is used to report a fault to the opposite end.
Remote loopback, which is used to locate a fault and test the link performance.
Self-loop check, which is used to check the self-loop port.
Loop shutdown, which is used to block a self-loop port and rectify a port loop.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 35 of 223

Product Description
2.15 Security Management

The T2000 uses many schemes to ensure the security of the OptiX OSN 7500 NE.
l
Authentication management
Authorization Management
Network Security Management
System Security Management
Log Management
For the details of security management, refer to the Security Management.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 36 of 223

Product Description
Hardware
3.1 Overview
The OptiX OSN 7500 consists of the cabinet, subrack, and boards.
Figure 3-1 shows the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack installed in an ETSI cabinet.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 37 of 223

Product Description
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 equipment

1
3
5
7
H
D
1. DC
PDU
2. Side panel
3. Cable distribution
plate
5.
Subrack
6. fiber management
tray
7. Front door
4. Orderwire phone
fixing frame
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses various types of boards and thus forms the system frame
where the cross-connect matrix is the core. The system frame of the OptiX OSN 7500
has the following units:
l
SDH interface unit
PDH interface unit
DDN interface unit
Data (Ethernet/ATM/SAN/Video) processing unit
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 38 of 223

Product Description
l
WDM processing unit
SDH cross-connect matrix unit
Synchronous timing unit
SCC unit
Overhead processing unit
Power interface unit
Auxiliary interface unit
Optical amplifier unit and dispersion compensation unit
Figure 3-2 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 7500.
SDH/PDH/Ethernet/
ATM/DDN interface
board
PDH signal
SDH signal
Ethernet signal
ATM signal
DDN signal
SCC unit
Auxiliary
Interface unit
unit
Cross-connect
matrix
Synchronous
timing unit
Overhead
signal
unit
STM-N optical
processing
SDH interface
Figure 3-2 System architecture
3.2 Cabinet
The cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 7500. A
power supply box is installed on the top of the cabinet to access 48 V or 60 V
power.
Figure 3-3 shows the outer view of an ETSI cabinet.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 39 of 223

Product Description
Figure 3-3 Appearance of an ETSI cabinet
T63E cabinet
N63E cabinet
3.3 Subrack
The subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.
3.3.1 Structure
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 40 of 223

Product Description
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the
lower layer has 18 slots.
3.3.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the
processing board area, interface board area, fan area, and fiber routing area.
Figure 3-8 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Figure 3-4 Structure of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Upper layer processing

board area
Fiber routing area
Interface board area
Fan area
Lower layer processing

board area
Fiber routing area
H
W
The functions of the areas are as follows:

l
Upper layer processing board area and lower layer processing board area: These
areas house the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500.
Interface board area: This area houses the interface boards of the OptiX OSN
7500.
Fan area: This area houses three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated
by the equipment.
Fiber routing area: This area houses the fiber jumpers in the subrack.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 41 of 223

Product Description
The interface board is also called the access board or transit board. The interface board
provides physical interfaces for optical signals and electrical signals, and transmits the optical
signals or electrical signals to the corresponding processing board.
3.3.2 Slot Allocation

The OptiX OSN 7500 subrack has two layers. The upper layer has 20 slots and the
lower layer has 18 slots.
Figure 3-9 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Figure 3-5 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
LS
O
L
TO
1T
82
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
3
Fiber
FAN
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S SLOT S
L
L
32
O
O
T
T
3
3
1
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
S
L
O
T
3
8
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
AUX
PIU(B)
routing
SLOT 40
FAN
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
SLOT 41
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
6
Fiber
routing
(A): Active
S
L
O
T
3
0
33
XCS(B)
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
2
9
XCS(A)
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
8
SLOT
Fiber
SLOT 39
S
L
O
T
2
7
GSCC(B)
EOW
S
L
O
T
2
3 4 5
PIU(A)
LS
OL
TO
1T
72
GSCC(A)
S L S LS LS
L L OL OL
O T O T O TO
T T 1 T 1T
1 4 2 52 62
9 0 1 2
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
routing
(B): S tandby
Slot Area for Interface Boards

l
Slots for the service interface boards: slots 1922 and 3538.
Slot for the orderwire interface board: slot 23.
Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 34.
Slot Area for Processing Boards

l
Slots for the service processing boards: slots 18, 1118 and 2631.
Slots for the cross-connect and timing boards: slots 910.
Slots for the PIU boards: slots 3233.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 42 of 223

Product Description
l
Slots for the system control and communication (SCC) boards: slots 2425.
Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for Processing
Boards
Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for
the processing boards.
Table 3-1 Mapping relation between slots for the interface boards and slots for the
processing boards
Slots for Processing Boards
Slots for Interface Boards
Slot 2
Slots 1920
Slot 3
Slots 2122
Slot 17
Slots 3536
Slot 18
Slots 3738
Paired Slots
If the overhead bytes pass through the backplane bus between two slots, the two slots
are paired slots. When an NE is configured with an orderwire phone or realizes the
service protection in DPS mode, the two boards that form a ring must be inserted in
the paired slots. Table 3-3 lists the paired slots.
Table 3-2 Paired slots
Slot
Paired Slot
Slot 1
Slot 18
Slot 2
Slot 17
Slot 3
Slot 16
Slot 4
Slot 15
Slot 5
Slot 14
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slot 7
Slot 12
Slot 8
Slot 11
Slot 26
Slot 27
Slot 28
Slot 29
Slot 30
Slot 31
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 43 of 223

Product Description
3.4 Boards
The equipment supports different types of boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards
The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards,
and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
3.4.6 WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
3.4.7 Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
3.4.9 Other Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
3.4.1 Classification of the Boards

The boards are classified into SDH boards, PDH boards, data boards, WDM boards,
and auxiliary boards according to the functions of the boards.
SDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH boards that operate at the STM-64, STM-16,
STM-4, and STM-1 rates.
Table 3-4 lists the SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-3 SDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1SL64
1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLQ4,
N2SLQ4, and
N1SLQ4A
4xSTM-4 optical
interface board
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 44 of 223

Product Description
Board
Description
Board
Description
T2SL64
1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLD4,
N2SLD4, and
N1SLD4A
2xSTM-4 optical
interface board
T2SL64A
1xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SLT1 and
N3SLT1
12xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SF64 and
N1SF64A
1xSTM-64 optical
interface board (with
the forward error
correction (FEC)
function)
N1SLQ1,
N2SLQ1, and
N1SLQ1A
4xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SLD64
2xSTM-64 optical
interface board
N1SL1, N2SL1,
and N1SL1A
1xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SL16,
N2SL16, and
N3SL16
1xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N1SLH1 and
N1SLH1A
16xSTM-1 signal
processing board
N1SL16A,
N2SL16A, and
N3SL16A
1xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N1SEP1
2xSTM-1 line
processing board
when the interfaces
are available on the
front panel
8xSTM-1 line
processing board
when the interfaces
are available on the
corresponding
interface board
N1SLQ16 and
N2SLQ16
4xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N2SLO1 and
N3SLO1
8xSTM-1 optical
interface board
N1SF16
1xSTM-16 optical
interface board (with
the out-band FEC
function)
N3SLN
1xSTM-16/STM-4/S
TM-1 optical
interface board
N1SLO16
8xSTM-16 optical
interface board
N3SLD41
2xSTM-4/STM-1
optical interface
board
N1SL4, N2SL4,
and N1SL4A
1xSTM-4 optical
interface board
N3SLQ41
4xSTM-4/STM-1
optical interface
board
PDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH boards that operate at different rates and
have different impedances.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 45 of 223

Product Description
Table 3-5 lists the PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-4 PDH boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1PQ1 and
N2PQ1
63xE1 service processing

board
N1PD3
and
N2PD3
6xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1PQM and
N1PQMA
63xE1/T1 service
processing board
N2PQ3
12xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1PL3 and
N2PL3
3xE3/T3 service
processing board
N1DX1
DDN service accessing

and converging board
N1PL3A
and
N2PL3A
3xE3/T3 service
processing board (The
interfaces are available on
the front panel.)
N1DXA
DDN service converging

and processing board
N2SPQ4
4xE4/STM-1 electrical
processing board
Data Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the data boards that provide the transparent
transmission function, switching function, or RPR function.
Table 3-6 lists the data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-5 Data boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1EFT8
8xFE or 16xFE transparent

transmission board
N1EMS4
4xGE and 16xFE

transparent transmission
N1EFT8A
8xFE transparent
transmission board
N1EMS2
2xGE and 16xFE

N1EGT2
and
N2EGT2
2xGE transparent
transmission board
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
and
N4EGS4
4xGE switching and

processing board
N2EFS0,
N4EFS0,
and
N5EFS0
8xFE switching and

processing board
N2EGR2
2xGE ring processing

board
N1EFS0A
16xFE switching and

processing board
N2EMR0
12xFE and 1xGE ring

processing board
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 46 of 223

Product Description
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1EFS4,
N2EFS4,
and
N3EFS4
4xFE switching and

processing board
N1ADL4
1xSTM-4 ATM service

processing board
N2EGS2
and
N3EGS2
2xGE switching and

processing board
N1ADQ1
4xSTM-1 ATM service

processing board
N1MST4
4-port multi-service
board
N1IDL4
1xSTM-4 ATM service

processing board
N1EAS2
2-port 10xGE Layer 2

switching and processing
board
N1IDQ1
4xSTM-1 ATM service

processing board
Interface Boards and Switching and Bridging Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports optical interface boards, electrical interface boards,
and switching and bridging boards.
Table 3-7 lists the interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-6 Interface boards and switching and bridging boards that the OptiX OSN 7500
supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1EU08
8xSTM-1 electrical interface

board
N1D12S
32xE1/T1 switching
access board (120 ohms)
N1OU08
8xSTM-1 optical interface

board (LC)
N1D12B
32xE1/T1 access board

(120 ohms)
N2OU08
8xSTM-1 optical interface

board (SC)
N1EFF8
and
N1EFF8A
8x100M Ethernet optical

interface board
N1D75S
32xE1 switching access

board (75 ohms)
N1ETF8
and
N1ETF8A
8x100M Ethernet twisted

pair interface board
N1MU04
4xE4/STM-1 electrical
interface board
N1ETS8
8x10/100M Ethernet
twisted pair interface
switching board
N1D34S
6xE3/T3 switching access

board
N1DM12
DDN service interface

board
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 47 of 223

Product Description
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1C34S
3xE3/T3 switching access

board
N1TSB8
8-channel electrical
interface protection
switching board
Cross-Connect Boards and System Control Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple system control boards and cross-connect
boards that have different cross-connect capacities.
Table 3-8 lists the cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-7 Cross-connect boards and system control boards that the OptiX OSN 7500
supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
T1GXCSA
General
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
T2SXCSA
Super cross-connect and

synchronous timing
board
T1EXCSAa
Enhanced
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
T1IXCSA
Infinite cross-connect
and synchronous timing
board
T2UXCSA
Ultra cross-connect
and synchronous
timing board
N2GSCC,
N3GSCC,
N4GSCC, and
N5GSCC
Intelligent system control

and communication
board
T1SXCSA
Super
cross-connect and
synchronous timing
board
a: The T1EXCSA cannot work with the line boards of series N2 (except for the
N2SLQ16). The T2SL64 is not delivered any longer and can be replaced with the
T2SL64A. It is recommended that you use the T2SL64A with the T1EXCSA.
Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports auxiliary boards such as the system auxiliary interface
board and fan board.
Table 3-9 lists the auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 48 of 223

Product Description
Table 3-8 Auxiliary boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
T1EOW
Orderwire processing board
T1AUX
System auxiliary interface board
N1FANA
Fan board (high power)
WDM Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM boards such as the optical add/drop multiplexing
board and optical amplifier board.
Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-9 WDM boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
TN11CMR2
2-channel optical
add/drop multiplexing
board
N1MR2C
2-channel optical
board
TN11CMR4
4-channel optical
board
N1LWX
Arbitrary bit rate

wavelength conversion
board
TN11MR2
2-channel optical
board
TN11OBU1
Optical booster amplifier

board
TN11MR4
4-channel optical
board
N1FIB
Filter isolating board
N1MR2A
2-channel optical
board
Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports microwave boards such as the microwave IF board
and microwave power board.
Table 3-11 lists the microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-10 Microwave boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
N1IFSD1
Dual-port IF board
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 49 of 223

Product Description
Board
Description
N1RPWR
6-channel ODU power board
Optical Amplifier Boards and Dispersion Compensation Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports multiple optical amplifier boards and dispersion
compensation boards.
Table 3-12 lists the optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that
the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-11 Optical amplifier boards and dispersion compensation boards that the OptiX
OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
Board
Description
N1BPA and
N2BPA
Optical booster and

pre-amplifier board
N1COA, 61COA, and

62COA
Case-shaped
optical amplifier
N1BA2
Optical booster
amplifier board
N1DCU and N2DCU
Dispersion
compensation
board
N1RPC01
Forward Raman
driving board
(external)
N1RPC02
Backward Raman
driving board
(external)
Power Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports power boards such as the UPM and power interface
board.
Table 3-13 lists the power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports.
Table 3-12 Power boards that the OptiX OSN 7500 supports
Board
Description
UPM
Uninterruptible power module
T1PIU
Power interface board
3.4.2 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several cross-connect and system control boards.
Table 3-14 lists the cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 50 of 223

Product Description
Table 3-13 Cross-connect and system control boards and their valid slots in the OptiX
OSN 7500
Board
Full Name
Valid Slots
T1GXCSA
General cross-connect and

synchronous timing board
Slots 9 and 10
T1EXCSA
Enhanced cross-connect and

Slots 9 and 10
T2UXCSA
Ultra cross-connect and

Slots 9 and 10
T1SXCSA
Super cross-connect and

Slots 9 and 10
T1IXCSA
Infinite cross-connect and

Slots 9 and 10
N2GSCC,
N3GSCC,
N4GSCC,
N5GSCC
System control and

communication board
Slots 24 and 25
3.4.3 SDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SDH processing boards.
Table 3-15 lists the SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-14 SDH processing boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type
Connector
T2SL64,
T2SL64A
Valid slots when the cross-connect

capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 38,
1116 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b,
L-64.2b,
Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2,
V-64.2b
LC

1118 and 2631
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 51 of 223

Product Description
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing
Mode
N1SLD64
If the cross-connect capacity is 240

Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
Interfaces
I-64.1, S-64.2b
available on the
front panel
LC

1112 and 3031
Interface Type
Connector
N1SL64
Slots 48, 1116 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-64.1, I-64.2,
S-64.2b,
L-64.2b,
Le-64.2,
Ls-64.2,
V-64.2b
LC
N1SF64
Slots 48, 1116 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF64A
Slots 48, 1116 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-64.2c,
Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e
LC
N1SF16

1116 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
Ue-16.2c,
Ue-16.2d
LC
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
L-16.2,
L-16.2Je,
V-16.2Je,
U-16.2Je
LC

1118 and 2631
N1SL16,
N2SL16,
N3SL16

1116 and 2631
1118 and 2631
N1SLD16
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
N1SLO16
If the cross-connect capacity is 240

Gbit/s, these slots are unavailable.
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC

1112 and 3031
N1SL16A
,
N2SL16A

1116 and 2631
1118 and 2631
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 52 of 223

Product Description
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N1SLQ16
,
N2SLQ16

capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and
1718 (for the board housed in any
of slots 12 and 1718, two optical
interfaces can be configured), and
slots 38, 1116 and 2631 (for the
board housed in any of slots 38,
1116 and 2631, four optical
interfaces can be configured)
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2
LC
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC

1118 and 2631 (for the board
housed in any of slots 18, 1118
and 2631, four optical interfaces
can be configured)
N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4
A,
N2SLQ4

of slots 12 and 1718, two optical
interfaces can be configured), or
1116 and 2631, four optical
and 2631, four optical interfaces
can be configured)
N3SLD41
,
N3SLQ41
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1/I-4,
S-1.1/S-4.1,
L-1.1/L-4.1,
L-1.2/L-4.2,
Le-1.2/Le-4.2
LC
N1SLD4,
N1SLD4A
, N2SLD4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
N1SL4,
N1SL4A,
N2SL4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1,

L-4.2, Ve-4.2
LC
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 53 of 223

Product Description
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing
Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N3SLN
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1/I-4,
S-1.1/S-4.1,
L-1.1/L-4.1,
L-1.2/L-4.2,
Le-1.2/Le-4.2,
I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, L-16.2,
Le-16.2
LC
N1SLQ1,
N1SLQ1
A
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1,

L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N2SLQ1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SLH1,
N1SLH1A
Slots 23 and 1718
S-1.1 optical
Interfaces
available on the interface
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1OU08
LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N2OU08
S-1.1 optical
interface
SC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
N2SLO1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N3SLO1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1.1, S-1.1,
L-1.1, L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 54 of 223

Product Description
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing
Mode
N1SLT1

of slots 12 and 1718, eight optical
interfaces can be configured), and
1116 and 2631, 12 optical
Interfaces
S-1.1
available on the
front panel
LC
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
S-1.1
LC
Interface Type
Connector

and 2631, 12 optical interfaces can
be configured)
N3SLT1

capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 18 ,
1118 and 2631
capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 18 ,
1118 and 2631
N1SL1,
N1SL1A,
N2SL1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,

L-1.2, Ve-1.2
LC
N1SEP1a
Slots 23 and 1718
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
LC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N2OU08
I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1
SC
Interfaces
available on the
8 x STM-1 line
processing
board N1EU08
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
Interfaces
available on the
front panel
75-ohm STM-1
electrical
interface
SMB
N1SEP1b
Slots 13 and 1718
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 55 of 223

Product Description
Board
Interfacing
Mode
Valid Slots
Interface Type
Connector
a: The N1SLH1, N1SLH1A and N1SEP can be used with the N1TSB8 board to realize the TPS
protection.
b: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are boards of the same type. If they are used with the interface board,
they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. If the interfaces on their front panels are used, they are
displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.
3.4.4 PDH Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the PDH processing boards.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-16 lists the PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-15 PDH processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
N2SPQ4
Slots 23 and
1718
Interfaces available on the 4-port

electrical interface board N1MU04
75-ohm E4/STM-1
electrical interface
SMB
N1PD3a,
N2PD3
Slot 23 and
1718

electrical interface switching board
N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
SMB
N1PL3a,
N2PL3
Slot 23 and
1718

N1C34S
75-ohm E3/T3
SMB
N1PL3A,
N2PL3A
Slot 18,
1118 and
2631
Interfaces available on the front

panel
75-ohm E3/T3
SMB
N2PQ3
Slot 23 and
1718

N1D34S
75-ohm E3/T3
SMB
N1PQ1A,
N2PQ1A
Slot 13 and
1718

N1D75S
75-ohm E1 interface
DB44
N1PQ1B,
N2PQ1B
Slot 13 and
1718

N1D12S
120-ohm E1
interface
DB44
N1PQM,
N1PQMA
Slot 13 and
1718

N1D12S and N1D12B
120-ohm E1
interface and
100-ohm T1
interface
DB44
N1DX1
Slots 13 and
Interfaces available on the N x 64
RS449, EIA530,
EIA530-A, V.35,
DB28,
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 56 of 223

Product Description
Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Interface Type
Connector
1718
kbit/s interface board N1DM12
V.24, X.21, Framed

E1
DB44
a: The N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3, N2PL3, and N2PQ3 boards can work with the N1TSB8 board to
realize the TPS protection.
Table 3-16 PDH interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slot
N1DXA
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
N1DM12
Slots 1922 and 3538
N1TSB8
Slots 37 and 38
N1MU04
Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D75S
Slots 1922 and 3538
N1D12S
Slots 1922 and 3538
N1D12B
Slots 1922 and 3538
N1C34S
Slots 19, 21, 35 and 37
N1D34S
Slots 1922 and 3538
3.4.5 Data Processing Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports data processing boards.
Table 3-18 lists the data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-19 lists the data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-17 Data processing boards, their valid slots, and their interfaces in the OptiX OSN 7500
Valid Slot
Board
N2EGS2
Interfacing Mode
Interfaces available on
capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 12 and the front panel
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interface
Type
Connector
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
LC

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N3EGS2

Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
the front panel
Page 57 of 223

Product Description
Valid Slot
Board
Interfacing Mode
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Interface
Type
Connector
ZX

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EFS0A
N2EFS0,
N4EFS0a
N5EFS0
Slots 23 and 1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
the 8-port 10/100M
Ethernet twisted pair
interface board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
optical interface board
N1EFF8
100BASE
-FX
LC
the 8-port 10/100M
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8
100BASE
-FX
LC
the 8-port 10/100M
interface board
N1ETF8A
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8A
100BASE
-FX
LC
N1EFS4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622

Mbit/s)
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
N3EFS4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
N1EGT2

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EGT2

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
the front panel
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 58 of 223

Product Description
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type
Slots 13 and 1718 (622 Mbit/s)
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX
LC
Valid Slot
Board
Connector

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EFT8b
N1EFT8A
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (622

Mbit/s)
the front panel
10/100BA
SE-TX
RJ-45
N2EMR0

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
the 8-port 10/100M
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
10/100BA
SE-TX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45, LC
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC

capacity is 360 Gbit/s: slots 23 and Interfaces available on
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N2EGR2

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EMS4

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 59 of 223

Product Description
Valid Slot
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type
Connector
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)

the 8-port Ethernet
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
the front panel
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC

capacity is 240 Gbit/s: slots 23 and the 8-port Ethernet
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
board N1ETF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
RJ-45
the 8-port Ethernet
N1EFF8
10/100BA
SE-TX,
100BASE
-FX,
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
1000BAS
E-SX/LX/
ZX
LC
10GBAS
E-LW/LR
LC

1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slot 3 (2.5
Gbit/s)
1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EMS2

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)

1718 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EGS4,
N3EGS4,
N4EGS4

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
N1EAS2

1116 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s)
the front panel
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 60 of 223

Product Description
Valid Slot
Board
Interfacing Mode
Interface
Type
Connector

1118 and 2631 (10 Gbit/s)
N1ADL4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25

Gbit/s)
the front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1ADQ1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25

Gbit/s)
the front panel
Ie-1,
S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1IDL4
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25

Gbit/s)
the front panel
S-4.1,
L-4.1,
L-4.2,
Ve-4.2
LC
N1IDQ1
Slots 18, 1118 and 2631 (1.25

Gbit/s)
the front panel
Ie-1,
S-1.1,
L-1.1,
L-1.2,
Ve-1.2
LC
N1MST4
1718 (1.25 Gbit/s), or slots 38,
1116 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
X3.296/(
DVB-ASI)
EN50083
-9,
200-M5-S
N-I,
200-SM-L
C-I
LC

1118 and 2631 (2.5 Gbit/s)
a: The N2EFS0, N4EFS0 and N5EFS0 can be used with the N1ETS8 to realize the TPS protection.
b: The N1EFT8 provides eight FE electrical interfaces on the front panel. The N1EFT8 can be used
with the N1ETF8 to process 16-port FE electrical signals. The N1EFT8 can be used with the N1EFF8
to process eight FE electrical signals and eight FE optical signals.
Table 3-18 Data interface boards and their valid slots in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slot
N1ETF8, N1ETF8A
Slots 1922 and 3538
N1EFF8, N1EFF8A
Slots 1922 and 3538
3.4.6 WDM Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports WDM processing boards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 61 of 223

Product Description
Table 3-20 lists the WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 3-19 WDM boards, their valid slots and their interface in the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1MR2A
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
N1MR2C
Slots 1922 and

3538
the front panel
LC
N1LWX
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
TN11MR2
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
TN11MR4
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
TN11CMR2
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
TN11CMR4
Slots 18, 1118

and 2631
the front panel
LC
3.4.7 Microwave Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports Microwave boards.
Table 3-21 list the WDM boards, their valid and their interface slots for the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 3-20 Microwave boards, their valid slots and their interface for the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slot
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1IFSD1
Slots 18, 1118 and

2631
the front panel
IF
N1RPWR
Slots 18, 1118 and

2631
Power supply
interface
3.4.8 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports several optical booster amplifier boards.
Table 3-22 lists the optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface
in the OptiX OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 62 of 223

Product Description
Table 3-21 Optical booster amplifier boards, their valid slots and their interface in the
OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slots
Interfacing Mode
Connector
N1BA2
Slots 18, 1118 and Interfaces available on the

2631
front panel
LC
N1BPA,
N2BPA

2631
front panel
LC
N1DCU,
N2DCU

2631
front panel
LC
61COA,
N1COAa
Slots 101 and 102
Interfaces available on the

front panel
SC
62COAa
Slots 101 and 102

front panel
SC, E2000
ROPa
Slot 103

front panel
LC
N1RPC0
1
Slot 104

front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
N1RPC0
2
Slot 105

front panel
LSH/APC,
LC/PC
a: The slots for the COA and ROP displayed on the T2000 are logical slots and not
physical slots.
3.4.9 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the power boards and auxiliary boards.
Table 3-23 lists the mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the
power boards and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 3-22 Mapping relation between the valid slots and connectors of the power boards
and auxiliary boards supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Board
Valid Slots
Connector
T1AUX
Slot 34
SMB, RJ-45
T1EOW
Slot 23
SMB, RJ-45
T1PIU
Slots 32 and 33
Power supply interface
N1FANA
Slots 3941
UPMa
Slot 50
a: The UPM is in case shape. On the T2000, it is displayed as CAU board seated in
the logical slot 50.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 63 of 223

Product Description
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 64 of 223

Product Description
Software Architecture
4.1 Overview
The software system is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions
and works with other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE
software and NM system.
The software resides respectively on functional boards, the SCC, and NM computer.
Hierarchical structure ensures that it is highly reliable and efficient. Each layer
performs specific functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-1.
In the diagram, all modules are NE software except "Network Management System"
and "Board Software". The ASON software is also contained in the NE software.
Figure 4-1 Software architecture
Network Management
System
NE software
ASON software
High Level
Communication Module
Real-time
multi-task
operating
system
Network side Module

Equipment Management
Module
Database
Management
Module
Communication Module
Board Software
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 65 of 223

Product Description
4.2 Communication Protocols

Complete protocol stack and messages of Qx interface are described in ITU-T G.773,
Q.811 and Q.812.
Qx interface is mainly used to connect mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and
NE (NE) equipment through local communication network (LCN).
At present, QA is provided by NE management layer. MD and operating system (OS)
are provided by NM layer. They are connected to each other through Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, Qx interface provided by the system is
developed on the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1)
protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, IP layer uses serial
line internet protocol (SLIP).
4.3 Board Software

The board software runs on each board and it manages, monitors and controls the
operation of the board.
It receives the command issued from the NE software and reports the board status to
the NE software through performance events and alarm.
The specific functions include:
l
Alarm management
Performance management
Configuration management
Communication management
It directly controls the functional circuits in corresponding boards and implements

ITU-T compliant specific functions of the NE.
4.4 NE Software
The NE software manages, monitors and controls the board operations in the NE. In
addition, the NE software functions as a communication service unit between the
T2000 and the boards, so that the T2000 can control and manage the NE.
According to ITU-T M.3010, NE software is at unit management layer in telecom
management network, performing NE function (NEF), partial mediation function (MF)
and OS function at network unit layer.
Data communication function (DCF) provides communication channel between NE
and other equipment (including NM and other NEs).
l
Real-time multi-task operating system
The NE software offers real-time multi-task operating system to manage public

resources and support application programs.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 66 of 223

Product Description
l
It isolates the application programs from the processor and provides an

application program execution environment, which is independent of the
processor hardware.
Communication module
The communication module is the interface module between NE software and

board software.
According to related protocol, communication function between the NE software

and the board software is for information exchange and maintenance of the
equipment.
Through the communication, board maintenance and operation commands from

the NE software are sent to the boards. On the other hand, the state, alarm and
performance events of the board are reported to the NE software.
Network Side (NS) Module
The NS module is between the communication module and the equipment

management module. It converts the data format between the user operation side
(at the application layer) and the NE equipment management layer, and provides
security control for the NE layer.
Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:
Qx interface module
Command line interface module
Security management module
Equipment management module
The equipment management module is the core of the NE software for the NE
management. It includes administrator and agent.
Administrator can send NM operation commands and receive events.
Agent can respond to the NM operation commands sent by the administrator,

implement the operations of the managed object, and send up events according
to the change of status of the managed object.
High-level communication module
The high-level communication module exchanges management information

among NEs and between the NM system and the NE.
It consists of network communication module, serial communication module and

ECC communication module.
Database management module
The database management module is a part of the NE software.
It includes two independent parts: data and program.
The data are organized in the form of database, including network database,
alarm database, performance database and equipment database.
The program manages and accesses the data in the database.
4.5 Network Management System

The NM system implements a unified management over the optical transmission
network, and maintains all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDM NE equipment in the network.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 67 of 223

Product Description
In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, it is an NM system that integrates

standard management information model as well as object-oriented management
technology.
It exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module to
monitor and manage the network equipment.
The NM software runs on a workstation or PC, managing the equipment and the
transmission network to help to operate, maintain and manage the transmission
equipment.
The management functions of the NM software include:
l
Alarm management: collects, prompts, filters, browses, acknowledges, checks,

clears, and counts in real time; fulfills alarm insertion, alarm correlation analysis
and fault diagnosis.
Performance management: sets performance monitoring; browses, analyzes and

prints performance data; forecasts medium-term and long-term performance; and
resets performance register.
Configuration management: configures and manages interfaces, clocks, services,

trails, subnets and time.
Security management: provides NM user management, NE user management,

NE login management, NE login lockout, NE setting lockout and local craft
terminal (LCT) access control of the equipment.
Maintenance management: provides loopback, board resetting, automatic laser

shutdown (ALS) and optical fiber power detection, and collects equipment data to
help the maintenance personnel in troubleshooting.
Querying service alarm: queries the current real alarms on the service path;
determines the connectivity or degrade status of the service, according to the
current alarm; analyzes the faulty node and locates the faulty board.
Detecting the MS protection channel: detects the VC-4 channel alarms on the
VC-4 channel that maps the MS protection channel.
4.6 ASON Software

According to the ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network
(ASON) includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.
The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the
T2000. The transport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is
where the ASON software is applied, and uses the LMP (link management protocol),
OSPF-TE (open shortest path first- traffic engineering), and RSVP-TE (reservation
protocol-traffic engineering) protocols.
Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly
includes the link management module, the signaling module, the routing module, and
the cross-connection management module.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 68 of 223

Product Description
Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture

AOSN software
T2000
Signaling module
Cross-connection
management
module
NE
software
Routing module
LMP link management

module
Link Management Module

By using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following
functions:
l
Create and maintain control channels.
Verify member links and TE links.
Signaling Module
By using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following
functions:
l
Set up or interrupt service connections according to user requests.
Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.
Routing Module
By using the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:
l
Collect and flood the TE link information.
Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.
Compute service trails and control the routing.
Cross-Connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module provides the following functions:
l
Create and delete cross-connections.
Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 69 of 223

Product Description
Data Features
5.1 Ethernet Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the Ethernet
features of the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
5.1.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides many Ethernet boards to meet different Ethernet
service requirements.
Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3, Table 5-4, Table 5-5, Table 5-6 and Table 5-7 list the
Ethernet boards that provide the switching function. Table 5-8 lists the Ethernet
boards that provide the transparent transmission function.
Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4
Function
N1EFS4
N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Interface
4 FE
4 FE
Interface type
10Base-T, 100Base-TX
Interface board
None
Service frame format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1

q/p
JUMBO frame
Supported, 9600 bytes
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
None
Page 70 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EFS4
N2EFS4, N3EFS4
Uplink bandwidth
4 VC-4
8 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
12
Ethernet private line

(EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private

line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN

(EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual private

LAN (EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label
MartinioE label supported
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F (FrameMapped GFP)
Link state pass

through (LPT)
Supports P2P LPT
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
In compliance with ITU-T G.7042
Committed access rate

(CAR)
Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s.)
Intra-board link
aggregation
Not supported
Flow control
In compliance with IEEE 802.3x
Test frame
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Not supported
Ethernet performance
monitoring
Supported
NSF Function
Not supported
RMON
Supported
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
24
Supports P2P and P2MP LPT
Supported
Supported, in compliance with

IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Supported
Page 71 of 223

Product Description
Table 5-2 Function list of EFS0 and EFS0A

Function
N2EFS0
N1EFS0A
N4EFS0
N5EFS0
Interface
8 FE
16 FE
8 FE
8 FE
Interface type
10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
8 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
24
Ethernet private line

(EPL)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
Supported
Ethernet private LAN

(EPLAN)
Supported
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Not supported
Static MPLS label
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F,
LAPS, HDLC
GFP-F
GFP-F,
LAPS,
HDLC
GFP-F
Link state pass

through (LPT)
Supports P2P
LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
Supports
P2P and
P2MP LPT
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
16 VC-4
32
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8,
N1ETF8A,
N1EFF8A
N1ETS8
(used with
TSB8 to
realize 1:1
TPS),
N1ETF8,
N1EFF8
8 VC-4
24
8 VC-4
24
Page 72 of 223

Product Description
Function
N2EFS0
N1EFS0A
N4EFS0
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
Committed access
rate (CAR)
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported
Flow control
Test frame
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Not supported
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
NSF Function
Not supported
RMON
Supported
Supported
N5EFS0
Supported
Supported
Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
IEEE
802.3ah
Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
802.3ah
Supported,
in
compliance
with IEEE
802.1ag and
IEEE
802.3ah
Not
supported
Supported
Not
supported
Table 5-3 Function list of EGS2

Function
N2EGS2
Interface
2 GE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board
None
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE

802.1q/p
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of VCTRUNKs
48
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supported
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
N3EGS2
Page 73 of 223

Product Description
Function
N2EGS2
N3EGS2
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Not supported
Static MPLS label
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F
LPT
Supports P2P LPT
LCAS
CAR
QoS traffic classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI

flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Not supported
Flow control
Test frame
Supported
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Not supported
RMON
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link

aggregation
Not supported
Supported
Supports manual link

aggregation
Table 5-4 Function list of EGS4

Function
N1EGS4
Interface
4 x GE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX
Interface board
None
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p
JUMBO frame
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
N3EGS4
N4EGS4
Page 74 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EGS4
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv

(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT
Supports P2P and

P2MP LPT
LCAS
BPS
Supported
PPS
Supported
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
Supports flow control based on GE port, in compliance with

IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag and 802.3ah
Test frame
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and

distributed link aggregation.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
N3EGS4
Supports P2P
and P2MP LPT
N4EGS4
Supports P2P and

P2MP LPT
Page 75 of 223

Product Description
Table 5-5 Function list of EMS2

Function
N1EMS2
Interface
2 GE and 16 FE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,

100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board
Supports 2 x GE if the N1EMS2 board is not used with an

interface board. Supports 2 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS2
board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame
format
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x63); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x12)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
48
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Supports VLAN-based services.
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Not supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F
LPT
LCAS
BPS/PPS
Not supported
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+VLAN+PRI flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Not supported
Flow control
Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with

IEEE 802.3x.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 76 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EMS2
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Test frame
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation
Table 5-6 Function list of EMS4

Function
N1EMS4
Interface
4 GE and 16 FE
Interface type
1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T,

100Base-TX, 100Base-FX
Interface board
Supports 4 x GE if the N1EMS4 board is not used with an

interface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16 x FE if the N1EMS4
board is used with interface boards N1ETF8 or N1EFF8.
Service frame
format
JUMBO frame
Uplink bandwidth
16 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-12: VC-12-xv (x64); VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv

(x8)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
64
EPL
Supported
EVPL
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS
label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 77 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EMS4
LCAS
BPS/PPS
Supported
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, port+VLAN flow and port+SVLAN flow.
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
Supports flow control based on GE/FE port, in compliance with

IEEE 802.3x
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Test frame
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation and

distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-7 Function list of EAS2

Function
N1EAS2
Interface
2 x 10GE
Interface type
10GBASE-LW, 10GBASE-LR
Interface board
None
JUMBO frame
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
64 VC-4
Mapping mode
Virtual concatenation:
VC-3: VC-3-xv (x24); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8)
Contiguous concatenations:
VC-4-4C
Number of
VCTRUNKs
24
EPL
Supported
EVPL
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 78 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EAS2
EPLAN
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS Label
Not supported
VLAN
Supports VLAN and QinQ, in compliance with IEEE

802.1q/p.
RSTP
Supported
IGMP Snooping
Supported
Encapsulation
GFP-F
LPT
LCAS
CAR
QoS traffic
classification
Supports port flow, PORT+VLAN flow, PORT+SVLAN flow

and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN flow
CoS
Supported
Shaping
Supported
Flow control
monitoring
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Supported, in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag
Test frame
Supported
Link aggregation
Supports manual link aggregation, static link aggregation,

and distributed link aggregation.
Table 5-8 Function list of EGT2, EFT8 and EFT8A

Function
N1EGT2, N2EGT2
N1EFT8
N1EFT8A
Interface
2 GE
16 FE
8 FE
Interface type
1000Base-SX,
1000Base-LX,
1000Base-ZX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX,
100Base-FX
10Base-T,
100Base-TX
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 79 of 223

Product Description
Function
N1EGT2, N2EGT2
N1EFT8
N1EFT8A
Interface board
None
Supports 8 x FE if
the N1EFT8 board
is not used with an
interface board.
Supports 16 x FE if
the N1EFT8 board
is used with
interface boards
N1ETF8 and
N1EFF8.
None
Service frame
format
In compliance with Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG
JUMBO frame
Supported, 9600
bytes
Supported by the latter four ports, 9600

bytes
Uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4
8 VC-4
4 VC-4
Mapping mode
VC-3: VC-3-xv
(x24); VC-4:
VC-4-xv (x8)
VC-12: VC-12-xv
(x63); VC-3:
VC-3-xv (x3)
VC-12: VC-12-xv
(x63); VC-3:
VC-3-xv (x3)
Number of
VCTRUNKs
16
Ethernet
service types
Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported
MPLS
Not supported
VLAN
Transparent transmission
Encapsulation
GFP-F, LAPS, HDLC
LPT
Supports P2P LPT
LCAS
CAR
Not supported
Flow control
Test frame
Supported
Ethernet OAM
Supported 802.1ag
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supported
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Not supported
Not supported
Page 80 of 223

Product Description
5.1.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH
transmission platform.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:
l
EPL Service
EVPL Service
EPLAN Service
EVPLAN Service
EPL Service
The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services.
As shown in Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the
destination node through their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also
protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). This ensures the secure and reliable
transmission of services.
Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port
B
B
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK2
VCTRUNK2
PORT2
VCTRUNK 1
VCTRUNK 1
POTR1
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
EVPL Service
The OptiX OSN 7500 adopts two ways to support EVPL services.
l
Port-shared EVPL services. The services are isolated by VLAN tags and share a
bandwidth.
As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service
according to VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs from different departments of
Companie A. The two traffics are transmitted in respective VCTRUNKs.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 81 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-2 Port-shared EVPL services

Department 1
Headquarters of
company A
VLAN100
VCTRUNK1
VLAN100
PORT1
VCTRUNK2
VLAN200
PORT1
VLAN200
PORT2
Department 2
NE 1
NE 2
OptiX OSN
equipment
Enterprise
user
VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services. OptiX OSN 7500 adopts three ways to realize
convergence and distribution of EVPL services.
EVPL services based on VLAN ID, as shown in Figure 5-3.
EVPL services based on MPLS, as shown in Figure 5-4.
EVPL services based on QinQ, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-3 EVPL service based on VLAN ID

B'
B
VLAN200
VLAN200
VCTRUNK
VLAN100
A
PORT 1
VLAN100
PORT2
PORT2
NE 1
Community
user
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
PORT 1
A'
NE 2
Cyber cafe
user
OptiX OSN
equipment
Page 82 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-4 EVPL service based on MPLS

Add label
PE
Strip label
P
PE
PORT2
Department B
PORT2
Department
A
PORT1
Department B
VCTRUNK1
Department A
PORT1
NE 1
NE 2
Branch 2
Branch 1
OptiX OSN
equipment
Company A
Figure 5-5 EVPL service based on QinQ

Add label
C-Aware
Department
B
Strip label
S-Aware
S-Aware
C-Aware
PORT2
VCTRUNK1
Department
A
PORT1
Department
B
PORT2
NE 1
NE 2
Department
A
PORT1
Branch 2
Branch 1
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
EPLAN Service
Through the EPLAN service, NEs can communicate with each other and dynamically
share a bandwidth, the OptiX OSN 7500 adopts virtual bridge (VB) to support Layer 2
switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as the EPLAN service.
Each NE in the system can create one or several VBs. Each VB establishes a media
access control (MAC) address table. The system updates the table by self-learning.
The data packets are transmitted over the mapping VCTRUNK according to the
destination MAC address, as shown in Figure 5-6.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 83 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-6 EPLAN service
PORT1
VB
VCTRUNK1
Port 1
1
NE3
Department 3 of
company A
VCTRUNK2
PORT1
VB
PORT1
VB
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK1
Port 1
NE 1
NE 2
Port 1
Department 1 of
company A
Access
point
Department 2 of
company A
Company A
OptiX OSN
equipment
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN services can dynamically share the bandwidth and the data packets in
the same VLAN are isolated from each other. When the data services with the same
VLAN ID are accessed into the same NE and dynamically share the bandwidth, the
EVPLAN service can meet the service requirements.
As shown in Figure 5-7, the Ethernet processing boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 adopt
VB+S-VLAN filter table to support the EVPLAN services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 84 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-7 EVPLAN service
Port 1
VCTRUNK2
Department 3
of company A
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK1
Department 3
of company B
VB
C-Aware
S-Aware
S-Aware
NE3
Port 2
S-Aware
VCTRUNK1
C-Aware
PORT2
PORT1
VCTRUNK2
S-Aware
VB
LSP
VB
LSP
PORT2
PORT1
C-Aware
NE 1
NE 2
Port 2
Port 1
Port 1
Department 1
of company A
Port 2
Department 2
of company A
Department 1
of company B
Acess
point
Company A
Company B
Department 2
of company B
OptiX OSN
equipment
5.1.3 Protection
OptiX OSN 7500 provides layered protection on Ethernet services.
The optical transmission layer supports MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The protection schemes supported at the Ethernet service layer are as follows:
l
LCAS
The LCAS enables the configuration of system capacity, the increase and
decrease of the concatenated VC quantity, the dynamic change of bearer
bandwidth (services are not damaged during the dynamic change) and protects
and restores failed members.
For details, refer to .
STP/RSTP
The Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid
spanning tree protocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically
modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm. The STP or the
RSTP realizes link protection by restructuring the topology.
For details, refer to STP and RSTP.
Tributary protection switching (TPS)
The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a
protected board becomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board.
This ensures a reliable operation of the equipment.
For details, refer to 7.1.1 TPS Protection.
Board protection switching (BPS)
The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 85 of 223

Product Description
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches all the
services from the active board to the standby board to realize the service
protection.
l
For details, refer to BPS.
Port protection switching (PPS)
The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a
standby board. When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or
detects a board hardware failure, the cross-connect board switches the services
of one or more affected ports to the standby boards. In this case, a protection
switching for the entire board is not necessary.
For details, refer to PPS.
Link aggregation group (LAG)
A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the
same equipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An
LAG can be regarded as one link.
For details, refer to LAG.
DLAG
The DLAG requires two boards. One board is the working board and the other is
the protection board.
During switching, only the affected ports are switched and the other ports are not
switched. The equipment configured with the DLAG should be connected to the
equipment where the LACP is running. When any intermediate node is between
two equipment sets where the DLAG is configured, the intermediated node
should support the transparent transmission of the protocol packets.
The DLAG can be of modes: revertive or non-revertive.
For details, refer to DLAG.
LPT
The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network,
when the active and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the
LPT function is available for protection. When the working link becomes faulty,
the LPT function shuts down the local port so that the opposite router knows that
the working link is abnormal. As a result, services are switched from the active
port to the standby port. Thus, these services are protected.
For details, refer to LPT.
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP,
SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP schemes. For details, refer to 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3
SNCP.
5.2 RPR Features

The RPR of the OptiX OSN 7500 is suitable for the ring topology. The RPR can
quickly recover Ethernet services from a fiber cut or a link failure.
The main features of the RPR are as follows:
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 86 of 223

Product Description
l
Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real
time.
Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.
Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at the
destination node.
Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.
Provide RPR protection.
The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 uses a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are
in reverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. The outer ring and the inner ring
transmit data packets and control packets. Hence, this increases the bandwidth
utilization. The control packets on the inner ring carry the control information on the
outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information on
the inner ring. The two rings protect each other.
Figure 5-8 RPR ring
Node 1
Outer ring data

Outer ring control
Node 2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 4
Inner ring data

Inner ring control
Node 3
5.2.1 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
5.2.2 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.
5.2.3 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 87 of 223

Product Description
5.2.2 Functions
The RPR functions provide the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery,
spatial reuse and fairness algorithm.
Basic Functions
The N2EMR0 and N2EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the RPR features
defined by IEEE 802.17. Table 5-9 lists the basic functions of the RPR boards.
Table 5-9 Function list of RPR boards
Function
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
Interface
1 GE and 12 FE
2 GE
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG
JUMBO frame
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
Mapping granularity
VC-3: VC-3-xv (x2); VC-4: VC-4-xv (x8)
EVPL
Supported
EVPLAN
Supported
Static MPLS label
Stack VLAN
Supported
VLAN
Supports 4096 VLAN tags, and the adding, deleting, and

exchange of VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q.
Spanning tree
Supports RSTP and STP.
IGMP Snooping
Supported
RPR protection
Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering

protection schemes, with the protection switching time
being less than 50 ms.
Encapsulation
GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with

ITU-T X.86.
LCAS
Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042
CAR
Flow control
Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X
QoS traffic
classification
Supports traffic classification based on PORT,

PORT+VLAN ID, PORT+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI.
Intra-board link
aggregation
Supported
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 88 of 223

Product Description
Function
N2EMR0
N2EGR2
Weighted fairness
algorithm
Supported
Topology
auto-discovery
Supported
Maximum number of
nodes
255
Service class
Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR, and C
Service Class
The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is
further divided into the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR
(committed information rate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.
Table 5-10 lists the differences among these classes.
Table 5-10 RPR service class
Class
Subclass
Bandwidth
Jitter
Fairness
Algorithm
Application
A0
Pre-allocated,
irreclaimable
Low
Irrelevant
Real-time
services
A1
Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Low
Irrelevant
Real-time
services
B_CIR
Pre-allocated,
reclaimable
Mediu
m
Irrelevant
Near real-time
services
B_EIR
Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High
Relevant
Near real-time
services
Preemptible, not
pre-allocated
High
Relevant
Best effort
transmission
Topology Auto-Discovery
The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to
quickly discover the topologies and their changes, for all the nodes in a ring network.
Hence, the topology auto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.
To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS
function, which realizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without
affecting the existing services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 89 of 223

Product Description
Spatial Reuse
On an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial
reuse for ring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25
Gbit/s. Traffic 1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination
Node 4, and thus the bandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is
able to send traffic to Node 3 at a 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth
utilization is improved.
Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse
Node 1
Traffic 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2
Node 4
Traffic 2
1.25 Gbit/s
Bandwidth of single ring is

1.25Gbit/s
Node 3
Fairness Algorithm
The outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness
algorithm. The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C
services. The weight in the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes
can have different access rates. Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring
and the inner ring separately. In the case of preemptible bandwidth, these two weights
decide the bandwidth at which the node transmits lower-class services on the inner
ring and the outer ring.
As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On
the outer ring, assume that the preemptible bandwidth that is available for lower-class
services is 1.2 Gbit/s. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for
the lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of
Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the
fairness algorithm allocates 200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths for the
lower-class services transmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 90 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1
3
2
Node 2
Weight
1
Node3
Node4
Traffic
1
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
400 Mbit/s
Node 1
Node 3
1
Node
Node2
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
400 Mbit/s
Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different
3
2
Node 2
Node4
Weight
1
3
2
Node 1
Node 3
1
Node
Node2
Node3
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 6
Node 4
Node 5
Traffic
1
2
Bandwidth
400 Mbit/s
200 Mbit/s
600 Mbit/s
5.2.3 Application
The RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN
services.
EVPL Service
The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.
Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional
EVPL service. Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 91 of 223

Product Description
packet onto the RPR. Node 3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which
then strips the packet.
Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which the traffic classification
is based on port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of
Node 1.
Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping
Node 1
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
FE/GE
FE/GE
Node 2
Node 4
LSP
Action
Insertion
Tunnel
100
VC
100
Destination
Node 4
Node 3
Action
Action
Stripping
Tunnel
100
VC
100
Forwarding
Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence

VLAN 3
VLAN 2
Traffic
Tunnel
VC
Destination
Port1+VLAN 2
200
200
Node 2
Port1+VLAN 3
300
300
Node 3
Port1+VLAN 4
400
400
Node 4
GE
VLAN 4
Node 1
FE
VLAN 2
FE
Node 2
Node 4
VLAN 4
Dual-ring
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 3
FE
VLAN 3
EVPLAN Service
The EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and
encapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service
is realized by creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the
self-learning of source MAC addresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 92 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets
are accessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node
determines the forwarding port and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if
the destination MAC address of the packets is A1, the packets are forwarded through
Port 1. If the destination address is A2, the packets are forwarded through Port 2. If
the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets are forwarded onto the RPR
through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100. Node 2 forwards
packets in the same way.
Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service
A2
A1
MAC forwarding table of node 1

Port 2
Port 1
MAC
Port
stack VLAN
A1
A2
port 1
port 2
rpr1
none
none
100
rpr1
100
rpr1
100
B1
B1
Port 1
Dual-ring
A2
2.5 Gbit/s RPR
Node 2
B2
B2
C1
Node 1
Node 4
Port 2
MAC forwarding table of node 2
Node 3
Port 1
C1
MAC
A1
Port
rpr1
stack VLAN
100
A2
rpr1
100
B1
B2
port 1
port 2
none
none
C1
rpr1
100
5.2.4 Protection
The RPR services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected by various protection
schemes.
The protection schemes of the RPR services include:
l
Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering
When a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an

automatic loopback at the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, to connect
the inner ring and the outer ring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
The advantages of this protection scheme are enhanced protection speed and
minimal loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste of bandwidth.
In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead,
the source node sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that
is generated by the topology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on
the ring is less than 16, the steering protection switching time is less than 50 ms.
The advantage of this protection scheme is that it does not waste bandwidth. The
disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, the protection switching
speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.
In the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the

ring first performs a wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and
decrease the packet loss. After the topology auto-discovery protocol generates a
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 93 of 223

Product Description
new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protection so that the traffic is
sent to the destination through the best route. This reduces the waste of
bandwidth.
l
For details, refer to RPR.
LCAS
The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects
the bandwidth.
For details, refer to LCAS.
RSTP
The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP
realizes link protection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it
logically modifies the network topology to prevent a broadcast storm.
For details, refer to STP and RSTP.
Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and

SNCTP
At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the
MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.
For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
5.3 ATM Features

This section describes the functions, application and protection of the ATM features of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
5.3.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4,
ADQ1, IDL4 and IDQ1. The IDL4 and IDQ1 boards support the IMA function.
An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an ADQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the
N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3 board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3
ATM services.
Table 5-11 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 94 of 223

Product Description
Table 5-11 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1

Function
ADL4
ADQ1
Front panel
interface
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and

Ve-1.2
Connector type
LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or

N1PL3A board.
IMA
Not supported
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-3; VC-4: VC-4-xv (x4)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and

QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM
multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection
Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection
operation mode
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection
level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS (Alarm Indication Signal), RDI (Remote Defect

Indication), LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)
An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board
can access and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1
processing board, the IDL4 or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.
Table 5-12 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 95 of 223

Product Description
Table 5-12 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1

Function
IDL4
IDQ1
Front panel
interface
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
Optical interface
specification
S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and

Ve-4.2
Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and

Ve-1.2
Connector type
LC
Optical module
type
SFP
E3 ATM interface
Not supported
IMA (compliant with Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the
ATM Forum IMA
E1 processing board N1PQ1 or N1PQMA or N1PQM or
1.1 standards)
N2PQ1.
Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.
Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the
ATM port.
Each IMA group supports 132 E1 services. Supports the
mapping of a maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any
IMA group) to the ATM port.
Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4
ATM switching
capability
1 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-12; VC-4: VC-4-xv (X4)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR
Number of ATM
connections
2048
Traffic type and

QoS
IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0
Supported ATM
multicast
connections
Spatial multicast and logical multicast
ATM protection
Mode (ITU-T I.630)
1+1, 1:1
ATM protection
operation mode
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional, bidirectional
ATM protection
level (ITU-T I.630)
VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 96 of 223

Product Description
Function
IDL4
IDQ1
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Board level 1+1

protection
Supported, with switching time less than 1s
5.3.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.
Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 7500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR services, but does not
support ABR services.
l
The CBR services apply to voice services, and video services and circuit
emulation services of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed
transmission bandwidth and latency.
The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.
The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.
The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.
In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 7500 meets IETF
RFC2514, ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See
Table 5-13.
Table 5-13 ATM service types and traffic types
No.
Traffic Type
Service
Type
Parameter
atmNoTrafficDescriptor
UBR
None
atmNoClpNoScr
UBR.1
Clp01Pcr
CBR
Clp01Pcr
atmClpNoTaggingNoScr
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
atmClpTaggingNoScr
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr
atmNoClpScr
nrt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs
atmClpNoTaggingScr
nrt-VBR.2
atmClpTaggingScr
nrt-VBR.3
atmClpTransparentNoScr
CBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
atmClpTransparentScr
rt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,

Cdvt
10
atmNoClpTaggingNoScr
UBR.2
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 97 of 223

Product Description
No.
Traffic Type
Service
Type
Parameter
11
atmNoClpNoScrCdvt
UBR
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
CBR
Clp01Pcr, Cdvt
12
atmNoClpScrCdvt
rt-VBR.1
Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs,

Cdvt
13
atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt
rt-VBR.2
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
14
atmClpTaggingScrCdvt
rt-VBR.3
Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt
Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM Services

When the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service
processing board, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate
NEs, only SDH timeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In
this case, each ATM service exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central
node, the ATM services are converged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.
As shown in Figure 5-15, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively
occupy a VC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively
occupies a VC-4 bandwidth, and only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at
NE3. After the three services reach the central station NE4, they are converged by the
ATM board and are output through the 622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.
Figure 5-15 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services
DSLAM
34M ATM
Traffic
Service
Convergence
NE 1
155M ATM
2.5 Gbit/s SDH
Traffic
Ring
NE 2
622M ATM
Traffic
NE 4
Router
DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 98 of 223

Product Description
Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM Services

The VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical
multiplexing for ATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC
(VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv) path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.
As shown in Figure 5-16, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and
sends it to the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1).
Then, after the traffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent to the line by the
cross-connect board. NE2 accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and
then performs the ATM switching and protection configuration. At the same time, the
ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2 for ATM layer processing. Then, the locally
accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstream are encapsulated into the same
VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3 and NE4 is similar.
One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.
Figure 5-16 VP-Ring/VC-Ring
DSLAM
The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped to
the NE2,and then sent to VP/VC-Ring
after converged with local service.
34M ATM
Traffic
NE 1
155M ATM
Traffic
NE 4
Router
VC4-Xv
VP/VC-Ring
NE 2
622M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
NE 3
34M ATM
Traffic
DSLAM
Application of IMA Services

The inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM
integrated cell flow into several lower rate links. At the other end, the lower rate links
are multiplexed to recover the original integrated cell flow.
The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface
of the E1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not
process service types and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer
are transparently transmitted.
Figure 5-17 illustrates the IMA service networking.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 99 of 223

Product Description
Figure 5-17 IMA service networking
RNC
NE1
T2000
40km
25km
NodeB 1
NE4
NE2
STM-16 two-fiber
bidirectional MSP
ring
NodeB 4
30km
35km
NE3
NodeB 2
NodeB 3
5.3.3 Protection
The ATM services of the OptiX OSN 7500 are protected at several layers.
The protections that are available are as follows:
l
ATM layer protections
The ATM layer protections are classified in different ways. You can select a
combination of the following protection types as required, for example, 1+1
bidirectional non-revertive protection.
For details, refer to ATM/IMA.
Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and

SNCTP
The ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical
transmission layer, where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP,
and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this
way, when network impairment occurs, the MSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at
the optical transmission layer performs the switching first, thus achieving the
protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switching at the
ATM layer is not performed).
For details, refer to 7.2.1 Linear MSP, 7.2.2 MSP Ring and 7.2.3 SNCP.
1+1 board level protection for IMA boards
The IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection.
For details, refer to ATM/IMA.
5.4 DDN Features

This section describes the functions and application of the DDN features of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 100 of 223

Product Description
5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
5.4.1 Functions
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12
interface board to access and process DDN services.
Table 5-14 lists the functions and features of the DDN.
Table 5-14 Functions and features of DDN
Board Feature
Description
Processing
capability
Processes eight N x 64 kbit/s and eight framed E1 services,

and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s and 63 x 64 kbit/s signals at
the system side.
Bandwidth at SDH
side
48 x E1,and 63 x E1.
Interface
specifications
N x 64 bit/s interface: RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24

and X.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 and non-CRC4.
Interface
impedance
75 ohms or 120 ohms.
Connector type
The connectors are on the DM12 board. The DB28 connector

is used for N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44 connector is
used for framed E1 signals.
Protection
Supports 1:N(N4) TPS protection with the switching time

being less than 50 ms.
Loopback
Supports inloop and outloop for all the ports.
PRBS self-test
Supported.
Alarm and
performance
A large number of alarms and performance events are

provided to facilitate the equipment management and
maintenance.
5.4.2 Application
When the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX
OSN 7500, the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 101 of 223

Product Description
The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used for the following functions, so
various services such as RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1
can be accessed to a transmission network.
l
Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers
Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers
Access and convergence of multipoint routers
The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for
small-sized and medium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and
security service halls.
Figure 5-18 DDN networking and application
NE1
Branch of
company A
4 x 64k
4 x 64k
NG-SDH
NE2
Branch of
company B
NE4
Frame E1
Frame E1
Headquarters
of company A
Headquarters
of company B
NE3
OptiX NE
Enterprise user
As shown in Figure 5-18, point-to-point transmission of Nx64 kbit/s services can be

performed between the headquarters and branches of Company A, and point-to-point
transmission of framed E1 services can be performed between the headquarters and
branches of Company B. The Nx64 kbit/s services of Company A and framed E1
services of Company B can also be transmitted in hybrid mode over the NG-SDH
network.
For details, see the Planning Guide.
5.4.3 Protection
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides TPS protection for DDN services.
In TPS protection, when any working board is faulty or not in position, the DDN
services are switched to the protection board. This ensures the reliable operation of
the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports one group of 1:N (N4) TPS protection for the N1DX1
boards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 102 of 223

Product Description
5.5 SAN Features

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing
board, N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and
DVB-ASI services.
The detailed description of the N1MST4 board is as follows:
l
The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All the
port connectors are of the LC (SFP) type.
Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and
FC200) services, with the total bandwidth of not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board
also supports the full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one
FC200 (2125 Mbit/s) service or two FC100 services are supported.
The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH
side. FC100 (1062.5 Mbit/s )supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.
The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client
side. FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.
Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON (200 Mbit/s)or 4
x DVB-ASI (270 Mbit/s) services.
All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T
G.7041. All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 103 of 223

Product Description
ASON Features
6.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies

The automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the
control links and TE links.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links
The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links
The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
6.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about
its own control links to the entire network. See Figure 6-1. As a result, each NE
obtains the information of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the
information about the network-wide control topology. The following figure shows the
details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes
these routes into the route forwarding table, which is used for the signaling RSVP to
transmit and receive packets.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 104 of 223

Product Description
Figure 6-1 Auto-discovery of control links

ASON Domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically
discover the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the
management system for real-time display. See Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Management of control topology
R1
R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 105 of 223

Product Description
6.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE
protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP,
the TE link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the
entire network through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that
is, the network-wide resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the
deletion and addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports
the change to T2000, which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 6-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology
displayed on the NM in real time.
Figure 6-3 TE link auto-discovery
R1
R4
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
6.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very
convenient.
The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON
services. To configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node,
sink node, bandwidth requirement, and protection level. Service routing and
cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically completed by the
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 106 of 223

Product Description
network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and excluded link
to constrain the service routing.
Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing
and signaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure
services.
For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and
I in Figure 6-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures
cross-connection at nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A
to I, the network calculates the best route according to the configured algorithm. It is
assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l
Choose the bandwidth granularity.
Choose the server level.
Choose the source node.
Choose the sink node.
Create the service.
Figure 6-4 End-to-end service configuration
R1
R4
E
I
F
C
A
B
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
6.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and
network security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability.
Compared with the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not
need to reserve 50% bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy
increasingly large bandwidth demand. In addition, this networking mode also provides
more than one recovery route for each services so it can best utilize the network
resources and enhance the network security.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 107 of 223

Product Description
As shown in Figure 6-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network
calculates another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 6-5 Trail restoration
R1
R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
6.4 ASON Clock Tracing

ASON NEs support both the traditional clock tracing mode and the ASON clock
tracing mode. In an ASON domain, some or all ASON NEs can be set with the ASON
clock tracing mode. In this way, these ASON NEs form an ASON clock subnet.
In an ASON clock subnet, each ASON NE automatically traces the best clock source.
The clock is then automatically traced and switched. In this way, clock interlock is
avoided. In addition, the clock configuration is simplified. For an ASON domain with
many ASON NEs, several ASON clock subnets should be created if more than 20
ASON NEs are on the clock tracing link in a clock subnet. Each ASON clock subnet
generates its own clock tracing relation to trace the primary source in the local subnet.
In each ASON clock subnet, the change of primary source and link does not affect the
clock tracing relation in other ASON clock subnets. Generally, one ASON clock subnet
is created in one ASON domain.
Advantages of the ASON Clock Tracing

The ASON clock tracing has the following advantages.
l
Simple configuration: For one ASON clock subnet, only the primary clock need be
created to realize auto-tracing and auto-switching of the clock.
Auto-tracing and auto-switching: In an ASON clock subnet, the clock has the
auto-tracing and auto-switching features.
The ASON tracing avoids the clock interlock.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 108 of 223

Product Description
Clock Protection Protocol

To realize the ASON clock tracing, all ASON NEs within the ASON clock subnet must
start the standard SSM protocol.
Primary Reference Clock Source

Within the ASON clock subnet, the ASON software automatically sets the clock
tracing relation. At the edge of an ASON clock subnet, the external clock source, or
internal clock source of edge NEs should be manually set as the primary reference
clock source for the ASON clock subnet. The following clock sources can be set as
the primary clock reference source.
l
Line clock source
External clock source
Internal clock source of edge NEs
For one ASON clock subnet, several primary reference clock sources can be set. The
ASON clock subnet, however, traces only one of these primary reference clock
sources. The other clock sources back up the traced clock source. When the selected
primary reference clock source fails, the entire subnet automatically traces another
backup primary reference clock source. In this way, a new clock tracing tree is
established. A priority should be set for the primary reference clock source.
As shown in Figure 6-6, in an ASON clock subnet, primary and secondary clock
sources are configured at NE A and NE B respectively. Other ASON NEs in the ASON
clock subnet automatically create clock tracing trees by computation. In this way, the
entire subnet traces the primary BITS and all clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
When the primary BITS fails, each ASON NE creates the clock tracing tree by
re-computation. In this way, the entire subnet traces the secondary BITS and all
clocks in the subnet keep synchronous.
Figure 6-6 ASON clock subnet
BITS
Primary base
clock source
BITS
B
Standby base
clock source
:ASON NE
: BITS
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 109 of 223

Product Description
Interfacing Mode
By default, the ASON software automatically creates the clock tracing tree according
to the network topology. In this way, each ASON NE then can automatically trace an
available clock source. If necessary, set the interfacing mode of some optical
interfaces to the clock quality not detected mode to adjust the clock tracing tree. In this
way, these optical interfaces are excluded from the options of the clock tracing
sources for ASON NEs.
Regeneration Source
A regeneration source is a device used to regenerate clock signals. If an NE is
configured with such a device, the system tracing clock of the NE is strengthened and
the quality of the out-link clock is increased. During the computation for creating the
clock tracing tree, the clock signals strengthened by the regeneration source are
selected with priority.
For configuration of the regeneration source, 2M input and output interfaces are used.
An NE receives the upstream clock signals and outputs them to the regeneration
device. The regenerated clock signals then return to the NE through the 2M input
interface. The clock then works as the system tracing clock for the NE. In this way,
clock signals are strengthened and the line clock signals output from the NE are also
strengthened.
Clock Tracing Relation in the ASON Clock Subnet

The clock tracing relation in the ASON clock subnet is as follows:
l
The ASON clock subnet take priority to trace the primary source of the highest
clock quality.
If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality, the ASON
clock subnet traces the primary reference clock source of the highest priority.
If multiple primary reference clock sources are of the same quality and priority,
the ASON clock subnet traces the clock source in the trail with the least hops to
generate multiple clock tracing trees. In this way, too long clock tracing trail is
avoided.
If all the primary reference clock sources are invalid, the ASON clock subnet
traces the internal clock source with the smallest node ID. Thus, clocks in the
entire network are synchronized.
Hybrid Network of the ASON Clock Subnet and Traditional Clock Subnet
If the traditional clock subnet works in the SSM disabled mode, you should configure
the quality and priority of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock
subnet.
If the traditional clock network works in the standard SSM mode, you should configure
only the quality of the primary reference clock source in the ASON clock subnet.
If the traditional clock subnet works in the extended SSM mode, you should only
modify the subnet to the standard SSM mode, and then form a hybrid network with the
ASON clock subnet.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 110 of 223

Product Description
Modifying the Traditional ASON Subnet to the ASON Clock Subnet

If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the SSM
disabled mode, you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the quality
and priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the standard
SSM mode, you should directly create the ASON clock subnet and configure the
priority of the primary reference clock source.
If the ASON NE is working in the traditional clock tracing mode and in the extended
SSM mode, you should modify the extended SSM mode to the standard SSM mode.
Then you should create the ASON clock subnet and configure the priority of the
primary reference clock source.
6.5 SLA
The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the
service protection, as listed in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 Service level
Service
Protection and
Restoration Scheme
Implementation
Means
Switching and
Rerouting Time
Diamond
service
Protection and
restoration
SNCP and
rerouting
Switching time < 50ms

Rerouting time < 2 s
Gold
service
Protection and
restoration
MSP and rerouting
Switching time < 50ms
Silver
service
Restoration
Rerouting
Copper
service
No protection
Iron
service
Preemptable
MSP
No restoration
Table 6-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 111 of 223

Product Description
Table 6-2 TE links used by ASON services

Service Level
Working
Resource of TE
Link
Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Non-Protection
Resource of TE
Link
Diam
ond
servi
ce
Service
creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
rerouting
Not used
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Used with the

priority
Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
creation
Used with the

priority
Not used
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Service
rerouting
Used with the

priority
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Service
optimization
Used with the

priority
Not used
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Service
creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
rerouting
Not used
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Used with the

priority
Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Cop
per
servi
ce
Service
creation
Not used
Not used
Used
Service
optimization
Not used
Not used
Used
Iron
servi
ce
Service
creation
Not used
Used with the

priority
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Service
optimization
Not used
Used with the

priority
Used when the

resource is not
enough
Gold
servi
ce
Silve
r
servi
ce
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 112 of 223

Product Description
6.6 Diamond Services

Diamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
in the network, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond
services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking,
security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink
node. It is also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different
LSPs available between the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be
as separate as possible. One is the working LSP and the other is the protection LSP.
The same service is transmitted to the working LSP and the protection LSP at the
same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receives the service from the
working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
Figure 6-7 shows a diamond service.
Figure 6-7 Diamond Services
Working LSP
R1
R4
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP
:ASON NE
:User equipment
There are three types of diamond services.

l
Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 6-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 6-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 113 of 223

Product Description
Table 6-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services

Attribute
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between

the source node and the sink node.
Protection and
restoration
If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always

available for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is
the active LSP and the other is the standby LSP.
If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be

reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure
the service survivability.
Supports rerouting lockout.
Supports rerouting priority.
Supports three rerouting policies:
Rerouting
Use existing trails whenever

possible
Do not use existing trails

whenever possible
Best route
Supports Automatically Revertive, Non-Revertive, and

Scheduled revertive.
Revertive
Service migration
After the automatically revertive diamond service is

rerouted, the service is automatically reverted to the
original path if the fault in the original path is rectified.
After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted,

the user can set the service to be reverted to the original
path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to
30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is
rectified.
After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the

service is not reverted to the original route after the fault is
rectified.
Supports migration between diamond services and

permanent SNCP connections.
Supports migration between diamond services and gold

services.
Supports migration between diamond services and silver

services.

copper services.
Service switching
Supports manual switching.
Service optimization
Supports service optimization.
Service association
Does not support service association.
ASON server trail
Support diamond ASON server trails.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 114 of 223

Product Description
Attribute
Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Alarms to trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,

AU_AIS, B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 6-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.

Rerouting is not triggered.
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is
triggered to create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
Revertive
Service
migration
Service
switching
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Use existing trails whenever possible
Do not use existing trails whenever

possible
Best route

l
After the automatically revertive diamond service is rerouted,

the service is automatically reverted to the original path if the
fault in the original path is rectified.
After the scheduled revertive diamond service is rerouted, the

user can set the service to be reverted to the original path at a
specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes to 30 days) on the
NMS if the fault in the original path is rectified.
After the non-revertive diamond service is rerouted, the service

is not reverted to the original route after the fault is rectified.
Supports migration between diamond services and permanent

SNCP connections.

services.

services.
Supports migration between diamond services and copper

services.
Page 115 of 223

Product Description
Attribute
Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Service
optimization
Service
association
ASON server
trail
Alarms to
trigger
rerouting
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS,

B3_EXC (can be set), B3_SD (can be set)
Table 6-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute
Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements
for creation

source node and the sink node
Protection and
restoration
When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby
LSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.

Rerouting is not triggered.
When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Supports migration between diamond services and permanent

SNCP connections.

services.

services.
Supports migration between diamond services and copper

services.
Service
migration
Service
switching
Service
optimization
Service
association
ASON server
trail
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 116 of 223

Product Description
6.7 Gold Services

Gold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with
diamond services, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.
A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links
or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is
cut, the ASON triggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex
section protection fails, the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.
As shown in Figure 6-8, a gold service can be configured from A to I.
Figure 6-8 Gold services
R4
R1
D
A
MSP
MSP
F
MSP
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User equipment
Table 6-6 lists the attributes of gold services.

Table 6-6 Attributes of gold services
Attribute
Gold Service
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources

are available between the source node and the sink node.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 117 of 223

Product Description
Multiplex section
protection
Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear

multiplex section protection chain to create gold
services.
Supports using the working resources of a 1+1 linear

services.
Supports using the working resources of a 1:N linear

services.
Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber

bidirectional multiplex section protection ring to create
gold services.
Protection and
restoration
When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is

performed to protect services. When MS switching fails,
rerouting is then triggered to restore services.
Rerouting

possible

whenever possible
Best route

Revertive
Preset restoring trail
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
After the automatically revertive gold service is

After the scheduled revertive gold service is rerouted,

the user can set the service to be reverted to the original
path at a specific future time (ranging from 10 minutes
to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the original path is
rectified.
After the non-revertive gold service is rerouted, the

service is not reverted to the original route after the fault
is rectified.
Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Page 118 of 223

Product Description
Service migration
Supports migration between permanent connections

and gold services.
Supports migration between gold services and diamond

services.
Supports migration between gold services and silver

services.
Supports migration between gold services and copper

services.
Service switching
ASON server trail
Supports gold ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting

6.8 Silver Services

Silver services, the revertive time is hundreds of milliseconds to several seconds.
The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that have low
real-time requirement.
Silver services are also called rerouting services. When an LSP failure, the ASON
triggers rerouting to restore the service. If there are not enough resources, service
may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 6-9, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G
is cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the
cut fiber. Hence, services are protected.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 119 of 223

Product Description
Figure 6-9 A silver service
R1
R4
E
LSP after rerouting
I
D
C
B
H
G
R2
R3
Original LSP
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 6-7 lists the attributes of silver services.

Table 6-7 Attributes of silver services
Attribute
Silver Services
Requirements for
creation
Sufficient non-protection resources are available

between the source node and the sink node.
Service restoration
When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to

create a new LSP to restore services.
Rerouting
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)

possible

whenever possible
Best route
Page 120 of 223

Product Description

Revertive
After the automatically revertive silver service is

After the scheduled revertive silver service is rerouted,

the user can set the service to be reverted to the
original path at a specific future time (ranging from 10
minutes to 30 days) on the NMS if the fault in the
original path is rectified.
After the non-revertive silver service is rerouted, the

service is not reverted to the original route after the fault
is rectified.
Preset restoring trail
Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Shared mesh
restoration trail
Supports setting the shared mesh restoration trial for

revertive silver trials.
Service migration
Supports migration between permanent connections

and silver services.

silver services.
Supports migration between gold services and silver

services.
Supports migration between silver services and copper

services.
If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be

optimized before reverting to its original route.
Service association
Supports service association.
ASON server trail
Supports silver ASON server trails.
Alarms to trigger
rerouting

6.9 Copper Services

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the
abrupt services in holidays, are configured as copper services.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do
not reroute and are interrupted. Table 6-8 lists the attributes of copper services.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 121 of 223

Product Description
Table 6-8 Attributes of copper services

Attribute
Silver Service
Requirements for
creation

source node and the sink node.
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service migration
Supports migration between copper services and traditional

services.
Supports migration between copper services and diamond

services.
Supports migration between copper services and gold

services.
Supports migration between copper services and silver

services.
Service
optimization
Service
association
Supports service association.
ASON server
trail
Supports ASON server trails.
6.10 Iron Services

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured
as iron services. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the
services can be configured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.
An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply
non-protection resources or protection resources of the TE link to create LSPs.
When an LSP fails, services are interrupted and rerouting is not triggered.
l
When the iron service uses the protection resources of the TE link, if the MS
switching occurs, the iron service is preempted and the service is interrupted.
After the MS is recovered, the iron service is restored. The interruption,
preemption and restoration of the iron service are all reported to the T2000.
When the iron service uses the non-protection resources, if the network
resources are insufficient, the iron service may be preempted by the rerouted
silver service or diamond service. Thus, the service is interrupted.
Table 6-9 lists the attributes of iron service.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 122 of 223

Product Description
Table 6-9 Attributes of iron services

Attribute
Iron Service
Requirements
for creation
Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are

available between the source node and the sink node.
Multiplex
section
protection
To create iron services, the following resources can be used:

l
Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP
Protection resources of 1:N linear MSP
Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP
Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP
Service
restoration
Does not support rerouting.
Service
migration
Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent

connections.
Service
optimization
6.11 Tunnels
Tunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as
ASON server trails.
When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The
protection level for the tunnel can be diamond, gold, silver or copper. Then, use the
management system to complete the configuration of the lower order service. See
Figure 6-10.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 123 of 223

Product Description
Figure 6-10 Tunnel
VC4 tunnel
VC12 service
R4
R1
R3
R2
: ASON NE
: User equipment
ASON domain
The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service

types. Its cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be
configured manually. As shown in Figure 6-11, there is a tunnel between NE1 and
NE2 which can be a diamond ASON server trail, a gold ASON server trail, silver
ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASON
automatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line
boards.
After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order
cross-connection from the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or
optimization of the tunnels, however, the cross-connections at the source and sink
nodes automatically switch to the new ports.
In addition, the end-to-end tunnel and lower order service can be created.
Figure 6-11 Lower cross-connection
VC12
ASON server trail

VC4
NE1
VC12
NE2
Crossconnection
VC12
Tributary unit
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Line unit
Page 124 of 223

Product Description
Table 6-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

Table 6-10 Attributes of tunnels
Attribute
Diamond
Tunnel
Gold Tunnel
Silver Tunnel
Copper
Tunnel
Requirem
ents for
creation
Same as
diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Same as
copper
services
Service
restoratio
n
Same as
diamond
services
Same as gold
services
Same as silver
services
Does not
support
rerouting
Rerouting
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
Supports
rerouting
lockout.
Supports
rerouting
priority.
Supports
rerouting
priority.
Supports
rerouting
priority.
Does not
support
rerouting
Revertive
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Pre-config
uration of
restoring
route
Supported
Supported
Supported
Not supported
Service
associatio
n
Not supported
Not supported
Supported
Supported
Service
migration
Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent

connections.
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and gold tunnels.
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and silver tunnels.
Supports migration between diamond tunnels and copper tunnels.
Supports migration between silver tunnels and copper tunnels.
Supports migration between gold tunnels and silver tunnels.
Supports migration between gold tunnels and copper tunnels.
Service
optimizati
on
Tunnel
level
VC-4
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 125 of 223

Product Description
6.12 Service Association

The service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from
different points into the ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes.
During the rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the
route of the associated service. Service association is mainly used for services
(dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 6-12, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber
between B and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.
Figure 6-12 Service association
R1
R4
1+1 protection
1+1 protection
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 6-11 lists the attributes of service association.

Table 6-11 Attributes of service association
Attribute
Service Association
Service creation
Supports the creation of the associated services with the same

source node.
Service
optimization
Supports optimization of associated services.
Rerouting
When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated

service.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 126 of 223

Product Description
Attribute
Service Association
Service type
Supports the association of two silver services.
Supports association of two copper services.
Supports the association of a silver service and a copper

service.
Supports the association of two silver tunnels.
Supports the association of two copper tunnels.
Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.
6.13 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory
routes and thus requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a
new LSP, switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original
LSP to change and optimize the service without disrupting the service. Of course, the
service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l
Only manual optimization is supported.
The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are

not allowed.
During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting

operations, optimization is not allowed.
The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper
and tunnel services.
6.14 Service Migration

OptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON
services and traditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion,
which would not interrupt the services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l
Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connections
Migration between gold services and permanent connections
Migration between silver services and permanent connections
Migration between copper services and permanent connections
Migration between iron services and permanent connections
Migration between tunnel services and server trail.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 127 of 223

Product Description
Service Migration between ASON Trails

Currently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:
l
Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper service
Migration between a diamond, a gold, silver, copper tunnels
6.15 Reverting Services to Original Routes

After many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original
routes. You can revert all service to the original routes.
Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. If the original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the
services can be adjusted to the original route manually.
6.16 Preset Restoring Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail
failure. To this end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for
restoration. This function helps increase the controllability of service routing.
The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for a diamond/silver/gold
ASON trail. When the ASON trail reroutes, the service is restored to the preset
restoring trail firstly.
6.17 Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

For a revertive silver service, a restoration trail can be reserved. In the case of
rerouting, the silver service reroutes to the reserved restoration trail. Such a
restoration trail is called a shared mesh restoration trail.
When a service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail reroutes, the service
uses the resources on this trail with priority. If all resources on the shared mesh
restoration trail are usable, these resources are used for service restoration. If only
partial resources on the shared mesh restoration trail are usable, these resources are
used with priority for computation of a restoration trail. The other resources may be
faulty or used by other services that share the trail.
As shown in Figure 6-13, the shared mesh restoration trail for two revertive silver
services share the TE link and timeslots between G and H. When the revertive silver
service 1 (A-B-C) reroutes, the service directly reroutes to the shared mesh
restoration trail 1 (A-G-H-C). When the revertive silver service 2 (D-E-F) reroutes, the
service directly reroutes to the shared mesh restoration trail 2 (D-G-H-F). If both silver
services reroute, only one of them can reroute to the shared mesh restoration trail, for
the two restoration trails share the TE link and timeslots between G and H.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 128 of 223

Product Description
Figure 6-13 Shared mesh restoration trail

Revertive silver service 1
A
Share MESH
restoration trail 1
H
G
Share MESH
restoration trail 2
Revertive silver service 2
Features of the Shared Mesh Restoration Trail

The shared mesh restoration trail has the following features.
l
Only the revertive silver service can be configured with the shared mesh
restoration trail.
A shared mesh restoration trail cannot be set to concatenation services at

different levels.
For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, the revertive
attribute cannot be changed.
The resources on a shared mesh restoration trail can only be the unprotected
resources of TE links.
For a silver service configured with the shared mesh restoration trail, do not set
the preset restoration trail.
Differences Between Shared Mesh Restoration Trail and Preset Restoration

Trail
The shared mesh restoration trail and the preset restoration trail have the following
differences.
l
For a preset restoration trail, only route information of the trail is recorded and no
resources are actually reserved. In this way, the resources for a preset restoration
trail may be used by other services. When the service reroutes, the preset
restoration trail cannot be used.
For a shared mesh restoration trail, resources are actually reserved. The
reserved resources cannot be used by other services. In this way, services can
be restored with the best effort. In addition, to increase the resource utilization,
the shared mesh restoration trails for different services can share some
resources.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 129 of 223

Product Description
6.18 Shared Risk Link Group

In the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in
one cable.
The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the
same risks, that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service
should not be rerouted to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the
network so as to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the
faulty link share the same risk and to shorten the service restoration time during
ASON service rerouting. You can change the SRLG attribute.
6.19 Amalgamation of ASON and LCAS

The ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.
LCAS
LCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of
VCTRUNK can be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in
Figure 6-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1
and two over path 2. If the VC4 in path 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all
Ethernet service without affecting the service of VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on
either path if necessary.
Figure 6-14 LCAS (different path)
Path 1
VCTRUNK1
Router A
NE1
NE2
Router B
Path 2
If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the
service. As shown in Figure 6-15, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4
fails, the Ethernet service remains unaffected.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 130 of 223

Product Description
Figure 6-15 LCAS (same path)
VCTRUNK1
Router A
NE1
NE2
Router B
ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within
one LSP group. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To
provide virtual services with the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as
separate as possible.
Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each
ASON trail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and
sink. The trails must also be as separated as possible.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 131 of 223

Product Description
Protection
7.1 Equipment Level Protection

The equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards
and 1+1 protection for power supplies.
7.1.1 TPS Protection
The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run
in a safe manner.
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit
With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards
The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards
The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1
protection.
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit
The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit
The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans
Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the
temperature of the equipment.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 132 of 223

Product Description
The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions
The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.
7.1.1 TPS Protection

The equipment supports TPS protection of many service types.
Table 7-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 7-2 lists the
TPS protection parameters.
Table 7-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards
Service
Type
Protection
Scheme
Supported Boards
Revertive Mode
E1/T1
One 1:N
protection (N
4)
N1PQM, N1PQMA,
N1PQ1, N2PQ1a
Revertive
E3/T3/E4/S
TM-1
One 1:N
protection (N
3)
N1PD3, N1PL3,
N2SPQ4, N2PQ3,
N2PD3, N2PL3,
N1SEP1
Ethernet
One 1:1
protection
N2EFS0, N4EFS0,
N5EFS0, N1EFS0A
DDN
One 1:N
protection (N
4)
N1DX1
a: The N1PQ1 and N2PQ1 boards do not support T1 services.
Table 7-2 TPS protection parameters

Parameter
Description
Priority
1X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is

the highest priority.
Switching type
Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching,

and automatic switching.
Switching condition
Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
The clock of the working board is lost.
The working board is offline.
The working board is cold reset.
The hardware of the working board fails.
A switching command is issued.
Page 133 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Description
Switching time
50 ms
Revertive mode
Revertive
WTR time
300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.
7.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units
With the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run
in a safe manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the
cross-connect and timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1
hot backup mechanism so that the cross-connect and timing units are protected. Table
7-3 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units.
Table 7-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units
Parameter
Description
Slots for working

and protection
boards
Slot 9 and slot 10
Switching condition
Revertive mode
The working board is cold reset.
The board is warm reset and the switching protocol is

triggered.
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original

protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.
7.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit

With the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.
For the OptiX OSN 7500, the GSCC board provides the system control and
communication (SCC) functions.
The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism. When the
active GSCC is working, the standby GSCC is in the protection state.
Table 7-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 134 of 223

Product Description
Table 7-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit

Parameter
Description
Slots for working

and protection
boards
Slot 24 and slot 25
Switching condition
Revertive mode

l
The working board is under a cold reset.
Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original

protection board becomes the working board, and the
original working board becomes the protection board.
7.1.4 1+1 Protection for Ethernet Boards

The Ethernet boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS and DLAG protection schemes.
The N1EMS4, N1EGS4 N3EGS4 and N4EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS, PPS
and DLAG protection.
The N1EAS2 board only supports the DLAG protection.
Table 7-5 lists the 1+1 protection parameters for Ethernet boards.
Table 7-5 1+1 protection parameters of Ethernet boards
Parameter
BPS, PPS
Slots for
working and
protection
boards
The bandwidth of the protection board is not less than the bandwidth
of the working board.
Switching
condition
Any of the following conditions

triggers the switching:
l
The port status of the working

board is Link Down.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
DLAG
Any of the following conditions

triggers the switching:
l
The clock of the working board

is lost.
The port to be protected on the

working board is in the Link
Down state.
The hardware of the working

board fails.
The clock of the working board

is lost.
The hardware of the working

board fails.
The working board is off line.
The working board fails to

transmit and receive packets,
but the protection board
transmits and receives packets
The working board is off line.
A switching command is
issued.
Page 135 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
BPS, PPS
DLAG
successfully.
Switching
time
350 ms
Revertive
mode
Non-revertive mode
In full duplex mode: 4 s

In auto-negotiation mode: 500
ms
l
Revertive (default)
Non-revertive
When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS or DLAG protection
switching, the following conditions must be met.
l
The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same
working mode as the protection group.
The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through
optical fibers or network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present
between the two ends.
The working mode should not be modified. Otherwise, the protection group
becomes abnormal.
The equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end
of the protection group.
7.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards

The N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support board-level 1+1
protection.
The N1IDQ1 and N1IDL4 boards support the DPS. When the DPS needs to be
configured.
Table 7-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.
Table 7-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards
Parameter
Description
Slots for working and

protection boards
Configured as required.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 136 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Description
Switching condition

l
A manual switching command is issued.
The working board is under a cold reset.
The power supply of the working board fails.
The clock of the working board fails.
Revertive mode
Non-revertive
Switching time
50 ms
7.1.6 Protection for the Microwave Boards

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the microwave boards that support the 1+1
HSB/FD/SD protection and the N+1 (N3) protection.
Table 7-7 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection for the microwave boards
Parameter
Description
Switching condition (the

switching occurs if one condition
is met)
The hardware of the IF board or the IF unit is

faulty.
The hardware of the ODU is faulty.
POWER_FAIL
VOLT_LOS (IF board)
RADIO_TSL_HIGH
RADIO_TSL_LOW
RADIO_RSL_HIGH
IF_INPWR_ABN
CONFIG_NOSUPPORT
R_LOC
R_LOF
R_LOS
MW_LOF
MW_RDI
The board is offline.
Switching time
500 ms
Revertive mode
Revertive
WTR time
300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600

seconds)
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 137 of 223

Product Description
Table 7-8 N+1 protection for the microwave boards

Parameter
Description
Switching condition (the

switching occurs if one condition
is met)
R_LOS
R_LOF
R_LOC
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD(Optional condition)
MW_LOF
The board is offline.
Switching time
50 ms
Revertive mode
Revertive
WTR time
300720 seconds (generally, set it to 600

seconds)
7.1.7 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit

The equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.
The OptiX OSN 7500 can access two 48 V DC power supplies by using two T1PIU
boards. These two power supplies provide a mutual backup for each other. When
either of them fails, the other power supply provides a backup to ensure normal
operation of the equipment.
7.1.8 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit

The WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.
In the OptiX OSN 7500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has
two types: One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and
selective receiving.
A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and
one board of this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single
receiving LWX boards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot
backup protection.
Table 7-9 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.
Table 7-9 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX
Parameter
Description
Slots for working and

protection boards
Configurable as required.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 138 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Description
Switching condition

l
Revertive mode
Non-revertive
Switching time
50 ms
7.1.9 Intelligent Fans

Intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the
temperature of the equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 uses three intelligent fan modules to realize heat dissipation.
The power supplies of the three fan modules are of mutual backup.
The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure
detection. When one fan module becomes faulty, the other fan modules operate at the
full speed. The running status of the fans is indicated by the corresponding indicators
on the front panel of the fan module.
7.1.10 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply

The equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this
protection, the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides reliable power backup for the +3.3 V power supply of
other boards, including the SCC and service boards by using the power backup unit
on the T1AUX board. When the power supply of a board fails, the backup power
supply immediately provides backup to ensure the normal operation of the board.
7.1.11 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions

The protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection
and overvoltage protection.
Power-Down Protection During Software Loading

The verification function is provided for applications and data. After software loading is
interrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or
data that are not successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the
loading to be resumed, until the software is successfully and completely loaded.
Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power Supply

The power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the
damage that may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.
When a board is in undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the
software can re-initialize the chip.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 139 of 223

Product Description
The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can
affect services. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to
unstable voltages, the value can be restored to normal.
When a board is in undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the
power supply on the main loop so that the system is protected.
Board Temperature Detection

Temperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and
timing board) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high
temperature, an alarm is generated to prompt the maintenance personnel about
cleaning the fans.
7.2 Network Level Protection

The network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI
protection.
7.2.1 Linear MSP
The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1
dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
7.2.2 MSP Ring
The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection
When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or
even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher
order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer
to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP
In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
7.2.7 RPR Protection
The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 140 of 223

Product Description
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
7.2.1 Linear MSP

The linear MSP supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1
dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP.
The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 7500 provides 1+1
and 1:N (N14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 120 linear MSPs. In
the 1:N protection scheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the
protection system. The switching time of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in
ITU-T G.841.
For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System
Planning Guidelines.
7.2.2 MSP Ring

The MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP
ring.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP
rings, with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.
Table 7-10 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN
7500.
Table 7-10 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 7500
Protection Scheme
Maximum Number of MSP Rings

Supported
STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring
STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring
14
STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring
22
STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring
40
The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 7500 has the following features.
Adjustable MS Bandwidth
The MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.
In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 7500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by
VC-4 without interrupting services. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS
bandwidth ranges from one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 141 of 223

Product Description
Upgradeable MS Bandwidth
The The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without
interrupting services. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an
STM-16 MSP ring without interrupting services.
Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex Section

For STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 7500 is able to process
two sets of K bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up
in one optical interface.
MS Squelching
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4
level.
In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by
extra traffic. When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a
node to be isolated from the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to
preempt this timeslot. As a result, the misconnection of services occurs. When extra
traffic is transmitted in the protection path, the traffic on the working path may preempt
the protection timeslot that is being used by extra traffic, even if only one point fails in
the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.
To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 7500 node sets up a detailed list
of connections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the
automatic protection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance
the possibility of misconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then
discards these services that may be misconnected.
The equipment supports the function of querying the MSP squelching. After the MS protocol
module triggers the MS squelching function and delivers the squelching status information to a
line board, the cross-connect board initiates a command to query the current MS squelching
status of the handshake detection board. Then, the cross-connect board compares the
squelching status with the relevant information stored on the cross-connect board. If the
squelching status is inconsistent with each other, the cross-connect board issues a command to
correct the MS squelching status.
7.2.3 SNCP
The subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP of the VC-12, VC-3,
VC-4, and AU-3 services.
SNCP
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected
trail and an SNCP-protected trail. See Figure 7-1.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 142 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected

trail
The unprotected trail
NE2
NE1
NE6
NE3
NE7
NE5
NE8
NE4
Convert to an unprotected trail
Convert to an SNCP-protected trail
The working trail
NE2
NE6
NE3
NE1
NE7
NE5
NE4
NE8
The protction trail
The SNCP function of the OptiX OSN 7500 is compliant with ITU-T G.841 and G.842.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 8064 SNCP protection pairs.
In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected
trail to an SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an
SNCP-protected trail to an unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level
operations are supported:
l
Manual switching to protection path
Manual switching to working path
Forced switching to protection path
Forced switching to working path
Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting
Revertive mode setting
SNCMP
The SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)
protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1
protection scheme.
The SNCMP of the OptiX OSN 7500 support a maximum of 3+1 multichannel SNCP
schemes. In addition, it supports a maximum of 1008 SNCMP protection groups.
The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service
protection is implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective
receiving at the sink. The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 143 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts
services to multiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according
to the service priority and then the service quality. When services are correctly
received on both the working and protection paths, the sink selects the service from
the working path.
Figure 7-2 Principle of multipath protection
A
B
Working
Protection 1
Source
Sink
Intermediate
subnetworks
Protection 2
Protection 3
In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 7-3, two protection paths protect a working
path, and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission
media. Under normal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.
Figure 7-3 SNCMP networking
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure
7-4, NE3 receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 144 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both
become faulty, as shown in Figure 7-5, NE3 receives the service from the second
protection path Protection 2.
Figure 7-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure
NE 3
NE 4
Protection 1
NE 2
NE 1
Microware
Radio
Working
Protection 2
Microware
Radio
SNCTP
The SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is
faulty, all its services can be switched to the protection path.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports a maximum of 896 SNCTP groups.
The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only
the entire VC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path.
When the working path is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all
services in the working path are switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant
only to lower order services, lower order alarms are raised, and the switching does not
occur.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 145 of 223

Product Description
7.2.4 DNI
The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of
inter-ring services. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings,
which are networked by the equipment from different vendors and adopt different
protection schemes. The DNI provides protection in the case of fiber failure and node
failure.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T
G.842.
The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:
l
Two SNCP rings
An SNCP ring and an MSP ring
Two MSP rings
Figure 7-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.

Figure 7-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings
NE A
SNCP Ring
1
NE C
NE D
NE E
NE F
SNCP Ring
2
NE G
Selecting Point
Forward Working Routing
Reverse Working Routing
When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.
l
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.
A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.
A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.
NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.
NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.
NE C and NE E are faulty.
NE D and NE F are faulty.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 146 of 223

Product Description
The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is
faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.
7.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection

When the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or
even STM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher
order channels. These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer
to form rings. In the case of the rings at the channel layer, protection schemes such as
the MSP, SNCP and non-protection can be set accordingly.
Figure 7-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
Figure 7-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection
STM-16
SNCP
STM-64
STM-64
STM-16
MSP
7.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP

In the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into
multiple MSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical
interface.
A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board must be able to
process multiple sets of independent K bytes. The T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SL64,
N1SLD64, N1SL16, N1SLO16, N2SL16, N1SF16, N3SL16, N1SF64, and N1SF64A
boards of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An
STM-64 or STM-16 optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes. Up to
two MSP rings can be created for an optical interface if the SF64 and SL64 boards
support STM-64 optical interfaces. The two sets of K bytes are separately located in
the first and seventeenth VC-4s. Up to two MSP rings can be created for an optical
interface if the SF16 and SL16 boards support STM-16 optical interfaces. The two
sets of K bytes are separately located in the first and fifth VC-4s.
Figure 7-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 147 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-8 Optical-path-shared MSP
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
Optical-pathshared MSP ring
STM-4/16
STM-16/64
STM-4/16
Optical-pathshared MSP ring
STM-4/16
STM-4/16
For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as
shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines
MSP ring 1
STM-16
STM-64
MSP ring 2
STM-16
The OptiX OSN 7500 also supports the line units at the same rate to form a shared
protection group in two directions, as shown in Figure 7-10. In this case, the west
STM-16 line units can only add part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.
Figure 7-10 One line shared by two lines at the same rate
MSP ring 1
STM-16
STM-16
MSP ring 2
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
STM-16
Page 148 of 223

Product Description
7.2.7 RPR Protection

The RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.
Figure 7-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The
outer ring and the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The
control packets on the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on
the outer ring, and the control packets on the outer ring carry the control information of
the data packets on the inner ring.
The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the
packets added to the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path
is used. A node can only perform three types of operations on the packets, that is,
insertion (adding a new packet onto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and
stripping (dropping the packet locally). Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet
ring considerably decreases the communication traffic among nodes. This is because
a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis of every single packet.
Figure 7-11 Example of bidirectional RPR
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 5
Node 3
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for
packets.
The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that
are adjacent to the fiber cut point. See Figure 7-12.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 149 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-12 RPR wrapping protection

Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3
Node 5
RPR
Node 2
Node 1
Wapping
The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case
of a fiber cut. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 RPR steering protection
Node 4
Outer ring
Inner ring
Node 3
Node 5
RPR
Node 1
Node 2
Steering
In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination in a reverse
direction, and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection
switching, the wrapping function is usually performed first. After the new topology and
the new service trail are created, the steering function is then performed. Such a
mechanism ensures that packets are not lost during the protection switching, and that
the protection switching time is decreased.
7.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection

The protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 150 of 223

Product Description
Figure 7-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The
VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves the protection resources, and can be
applied on any physical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes
and bandwidths.
Figure 7-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection
NE2
Working path
ATM
service
ATM
service
NE1
Protection path
NE3
NE4
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels
(VCs), and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving
mechanism. Two connections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the
protection path, are set up at the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. In normal
conditions, the receive end selects the service from the working path. When the
primary ring becomes faulty, the receive end detects the failure and triggers the
protection. In this way, the receive end selects the service from the protection path,
and thus the ATM service is protected.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 151 of 223

Product Description
OAM
8.1 Operation and Maintenance

The cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 7500 are designed according to
the customer requirements to facilitate the operation and maintenance of the
equipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 7500 provides powerful equipment maintenance
capability for customers.
Alarm and Performance Management

l
In the case of an emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual
alarms to prompt the network administrators to take proper measures.
The AUX board provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces,
four output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation
interfaces to facilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.
Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network
administrators to locate and rectify faults quickly.
Alarm storms can be suppressed. If the number of reported alarms exceeds 1000,
the NE reports that excessive alarms are generated. Then, the board does not
report excessive alarms.
The NG-SDH equipment supports the alarm muting function. You can mute an
alarm by pressing the key on the GSCC board or by using the NM interface.
The connectivity of the network cable between NEs can be automatically

monitored. After detecting any faults, they automatically report the relevant
alarms.
The working temperature of certain boards can be queried.
When an MSP switching or a TPS switching occurs, the state of an alarm or of a

performance event is not changed in the working path. Thus, the service
administrator focuses on the service state only.
ALS Function
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the
SDH and Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.
l
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is
generated at the optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for
500 ms, the laser of the transmit optical interface at the local end is automatically
Page 152 of 223

Product Description
shut down. By default, the laser pulse is generated at a 60-second interval and
lasts for 2s every time.
l
After the fiber connection is restored, the optical interface at the opposite end
detects the laser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical
interface at the opposite end then continuously launches laser beams. After
receiving the laser beams launched by the opposite end, the laser of the local
end then also continuously launches the laser beams. As a result, the two optical
interfaces can communicate with each other and the R-LOS alarm is cleared.
Optical Power Management

l
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH
and Ethernet optical interfaces.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH
optical module. The parameters that can be queried include the optical interface
type, fiber mode (single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance,
transmission rate, and wavelength.
The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose
single-mode or multi-mode optical modules according to the requirement, which
facilitates the maintenance.
The optical power threshold of the boards can be queried.
Multiple Maintenance Methods

l
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the orderwire phone function for management
personnel at different node sites to communicate with each other.
The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and
alarms of each equipment in a network.
The in-service upgrade of the board software and the in-service loading of NE
software are supported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely
loaded with the error-proof loading and resumable loading functions.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the
equipment becomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone
network to remotely maintain the OptiX OSN 7500 system.
The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N1PQMA, N2PQ1 line boards and cross-connect boards
support the PRBS test and the remote bit error test.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the press-to-collect function for fault data. This
function reduces the data collection time before service restoration. By using this
function, the user is able to selectively collect fault data, and to manually cancel
the collection according to the requirement.
The OptiX OSN 7500 provides the board version replacement function. This
helps to replace the board of an old version with the board of a new version. After
the replacement, the configuration and service status of the board of a new
version are the same as the configuration and service status of the board of a old
version old.
Ethernet boards provide the OAM function. This function is used to automatically
detect faults in Ethernet, and to help locate and isolate these faults.
The alarms of the services can be queried.
The connectivity status of the services can be determined.
The faulty node can be analyzed.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 153 of 223

Product Description
l
The power consumption of the equipment and boards can be queried and
controlled. After being inserted, the board does not work if the total power
consumption of the boards exceeds the power consumption threshold of the
equipment.
The port status can be queried.
The operation logs can be queried. The operations and maintenance activities
can be traced to determine the fault causes and the accident responsibilities.
The enabling state of detecting the alarms in the MSP protection path can be
queried.
The daylight saving time can be set. The daylight saving time is adjusted
according to the daylight saving time in the country.
8.2 Network Management

The OptiX OSN 7500 is uniformly managed by the OptiX iManager T2000
transmission network management system. The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,
Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-T
Recommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and
the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with
the NE software through the communication module, to implement monitoring and
management over the network equipment.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP),
which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different
vendors.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 154 of 223

Product Description
Security Management
9.1 Authentication Management

Considering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.
l
NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a

valid user name and a valid password.
NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each
time. For this reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE
simultaneously, they need to be switched to ensure that the data is unique.
Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by
simultaneous configuration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from
illegally logging in to the NE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at
lower level exit from the NE.
NE login locking: After the locking function is enabled, a user whose level is lower
than that of the current user is not allowed to log in to the NE.
NE setting locking: You can lock the settings of functional modules of the NE to
prevent other users from operating the locked modules.
Query the online NE users.
9.2 Authorization Management

Proper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful
operations performed by each user and the security of the NE system.
l
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
NE user management:
According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels,
which involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system
level, and debugging level in an ascending order.
According to the T2000, NE users are classified into LCT NE users, EMS NE
users, CMD NE users, and general NE users.
Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.
Modify the user name, change the password, modify the operation authority,
or change the user flag.
Delete NE users.
Page 155 of 223

Product Description
l
NE user group management:
According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided

into administrator group, super administrator group, operator group,
monitoring personnel group, and maintenance personnel group.
Modify the group of a user.
9.3 Network Security Management

Safe data transmission between the T2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the T2000
to effectively manage the NEs.
l
The T2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL)
protocol. Therefore, the data is complete and safe.
Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the
network, and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the
ACL rule is divided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.
For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule
only to check the source address of the IP packets only.
For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL
rule. In this case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source
port, sink port, and protocol type of the received IP packets.
If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the
advanced ACL rule to check the packets.
Query the ACL rule.
Modify the ACL rule.
Delete the ACL rule.
An NE can access the T2000 by using any of the following methods:
Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the T2000 to

access it over the Ethernet network.
Access through the serial interface.
Access through the OAM port.
Access through the COM port. Owing to the security, after an NE is initialized
or downloads data, by default, the COM access function is disabled. The COM
access function can be enabled when necessary.
Control the access to NEs by using LCT: If the T2000-LCT needs to be used to
manage NEs, you can enable the LCT access authority allowed by the NE on the
T2000.
When the T2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user
name and password) is encrypted.
9.4 System Security Management

Considering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be
executed forcibly.
l
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Query or set the Warning Screen information of the NE.
Page 156 of 223

Product Description
l
Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report
an alarm after a user logs in to the NE.
Query or set the earliest expiry time and the latest expiry time of the password.
Query or set the maximum number of illegal login attempts.
Query or set the maximum number of overdue password attempts.
Query or set the password uniqueness.
9.5 Log Management

The OptiX OSN 7500 provides log management functions.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management
The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
9.5.2 Syslog Management
The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
9.5.1 NE Security Log Management

The NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the
operation results. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the
operations.
l
Query the security logs of the NE.
Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.
9.5.2 Syslog Management

The system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an
NE. For unified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are
transmitted to the log server in the format complying with the system log (Syslog)
protocol.
The OptiX OSN 7500 supports:
l
Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol
Setting of Syslog protocol transmit modes: UDP (by default) and TCP
Adding and deletion of Syslog servers
Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers
at the same time
Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog

server and the NE
Figure 9-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the
security of system logs, make sure that at least two system log servers are available
in a network. Normally, IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 157 of 223

Product Description
the system log servers. The communication between NEs can be realized through
several methods, for example, ECC mode or IP over DCC mode.
Figure 9-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting
NE B
NMS
NE C
(client)
NE A
(client)
ECC/ IP OVER DCC
TCP/IP
real time
security log
Syslog Server A
Syslog Server B
NE D
Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system
logs of all NEs in a network.
A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the
system log server. In Figure 9-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.
When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly

communicate with the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence,
configure the IP addresses and port numbers on the NE, and the system is able to
transmit the NE logs to the two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of
IP protocol. No forwarding gateway NE is required.
When ECC mode is adopted on each NE for communication, the NE that does not
directly connect to the Syslog servers cannot communicate with the servers. The logs
of the NE must be transmitted to a gateway NE that directly communicates with the
Syslog servers through ECC. Then, the logs are forwarded to the Syslog servers by
the gateway NE. Hence, the forwarding gateway NE must be configured, for example,
configure NE A as the forwarding gateway NE for NE D.
For detailed Syslog configuration procedures, refer to the OptiX OSN 7500 Optical
Switching System Configuration Guide.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 158 of 223

Product Description
10
Technical Specifications
10.1 Overall Specifications of the Equipment

The overall specifications of the equipment include the specifications of the cabinet,
specifications of the subrack, power supply parameters, timeslot numbering, laser
safety class, timing and synchronization performance, transmission performance,
protection performance, and environmental specification.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and
number of permitted subracks.
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and
maximum power consumption.
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters
The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power.
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering
The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class
The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance
The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
10.1.7 Transmission Performance
The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
10.1.8 Protection Performance
The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 159 of 223

Product Description
The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
10.1.10 Environmental Specification
The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
10.1.1 Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet include the dimensions, weight, and
number of permitted subracks.
Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
Number of Permitted
Subracks
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000

(H) (T63E)
55
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000

(H) (N63E)
42
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000

(H)
79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200

(H) (T63E)
60
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200

(H) (N63E)
45
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200

(H)
84
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600

(H) (T63E)
70
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600

(H)
94
10.1.2 Specifications of the Subrack

The technical specifications of the subrack include the dimensions, weight, and
maximum power consumption.
Table 10-2 lists the dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-2 Dimensions and weight of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
496.4 (W) x 295 (D) x 756.7 (H)
30 (net weight of the subrack that
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 160 of 223

Product Description
Dimensions (mm)
Weight (kg)
is not installed with boards)
Table 10-3 lists the maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack.
Table 10-3 Maximum power consumption of the OptiX OSN 7500 subrack
Maximum Power Consumption
Fuse Capacity
1000 W
32 A
10.1.3 Power Supply Parameters

The equipment supports the access of the 48 V or 60 V DC power.
Table 10-4 lists the power supply parameters.
Table 10-4 Power supply parameters
Item
Specification
Power supply mode
DC power supply
Nominal voltage
48 V or 60 V
Voltage range
38.4 V to 57.6 V or 48 V to 72 V
Maximum power
consumption
1000 W
Maximum current
25 A
10.1.4 Timeslot Numbering

The equipment supports two TU-12 numbering schemes.
Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 describe the two TU-12 numbering schemes of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-5 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme I)
TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG
(7-4)
TUG
(7-5)
TUG
(7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
TU-3
(3-1)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3
(3-2)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 161 of 223

Product Description
TUG2
(7-1)
(3-3)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG
(7-4)
TUG
(7-5)
TUG
(7-6)
TUG
(7-7)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
Table 10-6 TU-12 numbering in a VC-4 (scheme II)

TUG2
(7-1)
TUG2
(7-2)
TUG2
(7-3)
TUG2
(7-4)
TUG2
(7-5)
TUG2
(7-6)
TUG2
(7-7)
TU-3
(3-1)
1 2 4 4 2 4 7 2 4 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 4 6
2 3
5 6
8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
TU-3
(3-2)
2 2 4 5 2 4 8 2 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 2 4 6
3 4
6 7
9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
TU-3
(3-3)
3 2 4 6 2 4 9 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 6 2 4 6
4 5
7 8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
10.1.5 Laser Safety Class

The safety class of the laser on each board is Class 1, Class 4, or Class 1M.
Table 10-7 lists the safety classes of the lasers on the boards.
Table 10-7 Laser safety class
Laser Safety
Class
Board
Class 1
N1SL64, T2SL64, T2SL64A, N1SF64, N1SF64A, N1SLD64,

N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16, N1SL16A, N2SL16A, N1SLO16,
N1SLQ16, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N1SL4A, N2SL4,
N3SLO1, N3SLN, N3SLQ41, N3SLD41, N3SL41, N1SLQ4,
N1SLQ4A, N2SLQ4, N1SLD4, N1SLD4A, N2SLD4, N1SLT1,
N3SLT1, N1SLQ1, N1SLQ1A, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N1SL1A,
N2SL1, N1SLH1, N1SLH1A, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N2EGT2,
N2EGS2, N3EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4, N3EGS4, N4EGS4,
N1EAS2, N2EGR2, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4,
N1IDQ1, N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8
Class 4
N1RPC01, N1RPC02
Class 1M
BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,

N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4,
TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4, N1IFSD1
10.1.6 Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance complies with ITU-T G.813.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 162 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-8 lists the timing and synchronization performance.

Table 10-8 Timing and synchronization performance
Performance
Description
Output Jitter
ITU-T G.813 compliant
Output Frequency in Free-Run Mode
Long-Term Phase Variation in Locked Mode
10.1.7 Transmission Performance

The transmission performance complies with ITU-T standards.
Table 10-9 lists the transmission performance.
Table 10-9 Transmission performance
Performance
Description
Jitter at STM-N Interface
Compliant with ITU-T G.813/G.825
Jitter at PDH Interface
Compliant with ITU-T G.823/G.783
Bit Error
Compliant with ITU-T G.826
10.1.8 Protection Performance

The protection performance complies with the ITU-T G.841 requirements.
Linear MSP
Table 10-10 lists the linear MSP parameters.
Table 10-10 Linear MSP parameters
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
1+1
single-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
Not
required
50 ms
1+1
single-ended
switching
Revertive
Not
required
50 ms
600s
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Non-revert
ive
APS
protocol
50 ms
R_LOS
R_LOF
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 163 of 223

Product Description
Protection
Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Protocol
Switching
Time
Default
WTR
Time
1+1
dual-ended
switching
Revertive
APS
protocol
50 ms
600s
1:N (N14)
dual-ended
switching
Revertive
APS
protocol
50 ms
600s
Switching
Condition
MSP Ring
Table 10-11 lists the MSP ring parameters.
Table 10-11 MSP ring parameters
Protection
Type
Revertiv
e Mode
Switching Mode
Two-fiber
bidirectiona
l MSP
Revertive
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
Two-fiber
unidirection
al MSP
Four-fiber
bidirectiona
l MSP
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Revertive
Revertive
Forced
switching
Switchi
ng
Time
Default
WTR
Time
Switching
Condition
50 ms
600s
Any of the
following
conditions
triggers the
switching:
50 ms
600s
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
Forced
switching - ring
Manual
switching - ring
Exercise
switching - ring
Forced
switching - span
Manual
switching - span
Exercise
switching - span
50 ms
600s
R_LOS
R_LOF
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
B2_SD
Forced
switching
Manual
switching
Exercise
switching
Page 164 of 223

Product Description
SNCP
Table 10-12 lists the SNCP parameters.
Table 10-12 SNCP parameters
Protectio
n Type
Revertive
Mode
Switching
Time
Default
WTR Time
Switching Conditions
SNCP
Revertive
50 ms
600s
Non-rever
tive
50 ms
Any of the following alarms

triggers the switching of VC4
level SNCP:
l
R_LOS
R_LOF
R_LOC
MS_AIS
B2_EXC
AU_AIS
AU_LOP
B3_EXC (Optional)
B3_SD (Optional)
HP_UNEQ (Optional)
HP_TIM (Optional)

level SNCP:
l
TU_LOP
TU_AIS
B3_EXC (Optional)
B3_SD (Optional)

level SNCP:
l
TU_LOP
TU_AIS
BIP_EXC (Optional)
BIP_SD (Optional)
10.1.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 7500 is designed according to the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127
standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed the electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) related tests.
Table 10-13 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 165 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-13 EMC test results

Item
Standard
Radiated emission
CISPR22 Class
AEN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for DC ports
CISPR22 Class A
EN55022 Class A
Conducted emission for signal

ports
CISPR22 Class A
Immunity to radiated
electromagnetic field
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to electrostatic
discharge
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to electrical fast

transient bursts for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to electrical fast

transient bursts for signal ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2
Immunity to surges for DC ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
EN55022 Class A
IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz2700 MHz: 10 V/m)
IEC 61000-4-2 (air discharge: 8 kV; contact

discharge: 6 kV)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
IEC 61000-4-4 (1 kV)
IEC 61000-4-5 (line to line: 1 kV, line to

ground: 2 kV)
Immunity to surges for signal
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to continuous
conducted interference for DC
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to continuous
conducted interference for signal
ports
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
Immunity to continuous voltage

dips and short interruption and
voltage variation for DC power
port
ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.3
IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV)
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)
IEC 61000-4-29
10.1.10 Environmental Specification

The equipment requires proper environment for normal operation.
The equipment can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in
Table 10-14.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 166 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-14 Environment specifications for long-term operation

Specifications
Description
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature
to 45
Relative humidity 10% to 90%

Anti-seismic
performance
Compliant with ETS300-019-2-3-AMD
10.2 Parameters Specified for the Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces, STM-4
optical interfaces, STM-16 optical interfaces, STM-64 optical interfaces, colored
optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces, and ATM optical interfaces. This topic
also provides information on wavelength allocation.
10.2.1 STM-1 Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces.
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation
This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical
interfaces.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 167 of 223

Product Description

Table 10-15 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-15 Parameters specified for the STM-1 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Application code
I-1
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 60
60 to 80 80 to
100
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1260 to
1360
1260 to
1360
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
15 to
8
19 to
14
15 to
8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 0
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
23
31
28
34
34
34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
14
10
10
10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
8.2
10
10
10
Ve-1.2

Table 10-16 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Application code
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 50
50 to 80
80 to
100
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 168 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Operating wavelength
range (nm)
1261 to
1360
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power

range (dBm)
15 to 8
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
1274 to
1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
15 to
8
3 to 2
3 to 2
3 to 2
23
28
28
28
34
Minimum overload (dBm)
13
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10.5

Table 10-17 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
2488320 kbit/s
Application
code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
L-16.2J
e
V-16.2J
e (BA)
U-16.2J
e
(BA+PA
)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 25
25 to
50
50 to
80
80 to
105
105 to
145
145 to
200
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1266
to
1360
1260 to
1360
1280 to
1335
1500
to
1580
1530 to
1560
1530 to
1565
1550.12
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 169 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
10
to 3
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
18
5 to 0
18
2 to
+3
27
2 to
+3
28
5 to +7
28
Without
the
booster
amplifie
r (BA):
2 to
+3
Without
the BA
or
pre-amp
lifier
(PA): 2
to +3
With
the BA:
13 to
15
With the
BA: 15
to 18
28
Without
the BA
or PA:
28
With the
PA: 32
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Without
the BA
or PA:
9
With the
PA: 10
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
12
1200
to
1600
2000
2800
3400
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Table 10-18 lists the parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-18 Parameters specified for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2666057 kbit/s
Application code
Ue-16.2c
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2f
Meaning of the code
FEC + BA (14
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17
dB) + PA
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

RA + PA
range (nm)
1550.12
1550.12
1550.12
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 170 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power

range (dBm)
Without the
BA or PA: 5
to 1
Without the
BA or PA: 5
to 1
Without the BA, RA,

or PA: 5 to 1
With the BA:

13 to 15
With the BA:

13 to 15
With the BA: 15 to

18
Without the
BA or PA:
27.5
Without the
BA or PA:
27.5
Without the BA, RA,

or PA: 27.5
With the PA:

37
With the PA:

37
With the PA: 42
Minimum overload (dBm)b
10
10
10
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)c
10
10
10
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For
example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14
dBm. "FEC + BA + PA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are
measured when the FEC, BA, and PA are used.
b: The parameter values are only for the PA.
c: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier are not provided.

Table 10-19 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1
I-64.2
S-64.2
b
L-64.2
b (BA)
Le-64.
2
Ls-64.
2
V-64.2b
(BA+PA+
DCU)
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
0 to
25
2 to 35
35 to
80
35 to
55
55 to
75
80 to 152
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 171 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290
to
1330
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
6 to
1
1530
to
1565
5 to
1
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1530
to
1565
1550.12
1 to
+2
Withou
t the
BA: 4
to +2
2 to 4
4 to 7
Without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU: 4
to 1
With the
BA: 13 to
15
With
the BA:
13 to
15
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
11
14
14
14
21
Without
the BA,
PA, or
DCU: 14
21
With the
PA: 26
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)
6.6
500
800
1600
1200
1600
2040 (with
the DCU)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Table 10-20 lists the parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of
the OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-20 Parameters specified for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
10709225 kbit/s
Application code
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
Meaning of the
codea
FEC + BA (14 dB)

+ PA + DCU (60 +
80)c
FEC + BA (17 dB) +

PA + DCU (80 x 2)
FEC + BA (17 dB)

+ RA + PA + DCU
(60 x 3)
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 172 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range
(dBm)b
1550.12
1550.12
4 to 1
4 to 1
4 to 1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)b
14
14
14
Minimum
overload (dBm)b
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)b
10
10
10
Dispersion
tolerance
(ps/nm)b
800
800
800
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For
example, "BA (14 dB)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the BA is 14
dBm. "FEC + BA + PA + RA" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface
are measured when the FEC, BA, PA, and Raman amplifier (RA) are used.
b: The parameter values are only for the optical modules. The parameter values of
the amplifier and dispersion compensation unit (DCU) are not provided.
c: The parameter values indicate the distances that correspond to different
dispersion compensation values.
10.2.5 Colored Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 lists the parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-21 Parameters specified for the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
2666057
kbit/s
9953280
kbit/s
10709225
kbit/s
Dispersion-limite
d distance (km)
170
640
40
40
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
640
Page 173 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
Launched
optical power
range (dBm)
2 to
+3
5 to 1
5 to 1
4 to 1
4 to 1
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
28
28
28
14
14
Minimum
overload (dBm)
Maximum
allowed
dispersion
(ps/nm)
3400
12800
12800
800
800
Minimum
extinction ratio
(dB)
8.2
10
10
10
10
Optical
signal-to-noise
ratio (OSNR)
(dB)
Without the FEC:

21
With the
FEC: 16
Without the
FEC: 26
With the
FEC: 20
Without the
FEC: 21
Without the
FEC: 26
10.2.6 Wavelength Allocation

This topic provides information on wavelength allocation of the OptiX OSN 7500.
The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 support the output
of the wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be
directly added to the WDM system. Table 10-22 provides the wavelength allocation
information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces.
Table 10-22 Wavelength allocation information of the STM-16 and STM-64 optical
interfaces
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
192.1
1560.61
21
194.1
1544.53
192.2
1559.79
22
194.2
1543.73
192.3
1558.98
23
194.3
1542.94
192.4
1558.17
24
194.4
1542.14
192.5
1557.36
25
194.5
1541.35
192.6
1556.56
26
194.6
1540.56
192.7
1555.75
27
194.7
1539.77
192.8
1554.94
28
194.8
1538.98
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 174 of 223

Product Description
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength
(nm)
192.9
1554.13
29
194.9
1538.19
10
193.0
1553.33
30
195.0
1537.40
11
193.1
1552.52
31
195.1
1536.61
12
193.2
1551.72
32
195.2
1535.82
13
193.3
1550.92
33
195.3
1535.04
14
193.4
1550.12
34
195.4
1534.25
15
193.5
1549.32
35
195.5
1533.47
16
193.6
1548.51
36
195.6
1532.68
17
193.7
1547.72
37
195.7
1531.90
18
193.8
1546.92
38
195.8
1531.12
19
193.9
1546.12
39
195.9
1530.33
20
194.0
1545.32
40
196.0
1529.55
10.2.7 Ethernet Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN 7500.
The characteristics of the 10-Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500 comply with IEEE 802.3ae. The characteristics of the Gigabit Ethernet optical
interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE 802.3z. The characteristics of the
100 Mbit/s Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 7500 comply with IEEE
802.3u. Table 10-23 lists the parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces.
Table 10-23 Parameters specified for the Ethernet optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Type of
Interface
Type
of
Fiber
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Operatin
g
Wavelen
gth
Range
(nm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Extinctio
n Ratio
(dB)
1000BAS
E-ZX (80
km)
Singlemode
LC
2 to +5
1500 to
1580
22
1000BAS
E-VX (40
km)
Singlemode
LC
4.5 to 0
1275 to
1350
23
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 175 of 223

Product Description
Type of
Interface
Type
of
Fiber
Launched
Optical
Power
(dBm)
Operatin
g
Wavelen
gth
Range
(nm)
Minimu
m
Overload
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimu
m
Extinctio
n Ratio
(dB)
1000BAS
E-LX (10
km)
Singlemode
LC
9 to 3
1270 to
1355
19
1000BAS
E-SX
(0.5 km)
Multimode
LC
9.5 to 0
770 to
860
17
100BAS
E-FX (15
km)
Singlemode
LC
15 to 8
1261 to
1360
28
10
100BAS
E-FX (2
km)
Singlemode
LC
19 to 14
1270 to
1380
14
30
10
10GBAS
E-LR
(LAN)
Singlemode
LC
-6 to -1
1260 to
1355
0.5
-12.6
3.5
10GBAS
E-LW
(WAN)
Singlemode
LC
-6 to -1
1260 to
1355
0.5
-12.6
3.5
10.2.8 ATM Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical
interfaces.
Table 10-24 lists the parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-25 lists the parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-24 Parameters specified for the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Application code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 20
20 to 60
60 to 80
80 to 100
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 176 of 223

Product Description
Parameter
Value
range (nm)
1260 to
1360
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
19 to
14
(dBm)
1261 to
1360
1263 to
1360
1480 to
1580
1480 to
1580
15 to 8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 0
31
28
34
34
34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
14
10
10
10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
10
8.2
10
10
10
Table 10-25 Parameters specified for the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN
7500
Parameter
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Application code
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Transmission
distance (km)
2 to 20
20 to 50
50 to 80
80 to 100
range (nm)
1274 to 1356
1280 to
1335
1480 to
1580
1480 to 1580
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-15 to -8
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
-3 to +2
(dBm)
28
28
28
34
Minimum overload
(dBm)
13
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
10
10
10.5
10.3 Parameters Specified for the Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces and DDN
electrical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 177 of 223

Product Description
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces
This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
10.3.1 PDH Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces.
Table 10-26 lists the parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces of the
OptiX OSN 7500.
Table 10-26 Parameters specified for the PDH electrical interfaces
Type of
Electrical
Interface
1544
kbit/s
2048
kbit/s
34368
kbit/s
44736
kbit/s
139264
kbit/s
155520
kbit/s
Line code
pattern
B8ZS,
AMI
HDB3
HDB3
B3ZS
CMI
CMI
Signal bit rate

at the output
interface
Complies with
ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Allowed
frequency
deviation at the
input interface
Allowed
attenuation at
the input
interface
Input jitter
tolerance
10.3.2 DDN Electrical Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 lists the parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces.
Table 10-27 Parameters specified for the DDN electrical interfaces
Type of
Interface
Description
Standard
Framed E1
interface
Framed E1
signal
The physical and electrical characteristics of

the interface comply with ITU-T G.703. The
frame structure of the interface complies with
ITU-T G.704.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 178 of 223

Product Description
Type of
Interface
Description
Standard
Nx64 kbit/s
interface
V.35 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.35.
V.24 interface
Complies with ITU-T V.24.
X.21 interface
Complies with ITU-T X.21.
RS-449
interface
Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A and

RS-422A).
RS-530
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530.
RS-530A
interface
Complies with EIA RS-530A.
10.4 Parameters Specified for the Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic lists the parameters specified for the clock interfaces, 64 kbit/s interfaces,
RS-232 interfaces, RS-422 interfaces, and orderwire phone interfaces.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications
The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
10.4.3 RS-232 Interface Specifications
The specifications of the RS-232 interface comply with EIA RS-232.
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
10.4.1 Clock Interface Specifications

The specifications of the clock interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the clock interface are listed as Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 Specifications of the clock interface
Specifications
Description
Output frequency
accuracy
Compliant with G.813
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 179 of 223

Product Description
Specifications
Description
Output jitter
0.05 UIpp
10.4.2 64 kbit/s Interface Specifications

The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface comply with ITU-T G.703.
The specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface are listed as Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface
Specifications
Description
Bit rate
64 kbit/s
Timing signals
From RX
Coding style
Compliant
Output interface characteristics
Incoming interface characteristics

The specifications of the RS-232 interface are listed as Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Specifications of the RS-232 interface
Specifications
Description
Bit rate
19.2 kbit/s
Mode
RS-232 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels
5V15V

The specifications of the RS-422 interface are listed as Table 10-31.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 180 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-31 Specifications of the RS-422 interface

Specifications
Description
Bit rate
19.2 kbit/s
Mode
RS-422 Tx & Rx data only
Electrical levels
2.0V
10.4.5 Orderwire Phone Interface Specifications

The specifications of the orerwire phone interface comply with ITU-T.
The specifications of the orerwire phone interface are listed as Table 10-32.
Table 10-32 Specifications of the orerwire phone interface
Specifications
Description
Speech channel interface

Impedance
600 ohms
Bandwidth
300 Hz3400 Hz
Operating current
18 mA
Input gain
4/0/0 dB
Output gain
0/7/0 dB
Signalling
DTMF compliant with ITU-T Rec. Q.23
Analog EOW extension

Impedance
600 ohms
Bandwidth
300 Hz3400 Hz
Tx level
3.5 dBr 1 dBr
Rx level
3.5 dBr 1 dBr
10.5 Microwave RF Performance

This topic describes the radio work mode, frequency band, receiver sensitivity,
transceiver performance, distortion sensitivity, IF performance, baseband signal
processing performance of the modem, and link reliability.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes
The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH
microwave frames.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 181 of 223

Product Description
10.5.2 Frequency Band

Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity
Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance
Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance
The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for
fighting against multipath fading.
10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M
signals.
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the
performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for
baseband signals.
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability
The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different
link reliabilities.
10.5.1 Radio Work Modes

The OptiX OSN equipment supports various work modes bases on TU/SDH
microwave frames.
Table 10-33 Radio work modes
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
4E1
QPSK
4E1
16QAM
3.5
8E1
QPSK
14 (13.75)
8E1
16QAM
16E1
QPSK
28 (27.5)
16E1
16QAM
14 (13.75)
STM-1
128QAM
28
22E1
32QAM
14 (13.75)
26E1
64QAM
14 (13.75)
32E1
128QAM
14 (13.75)
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 182 of 223

Product Description
Service Capacity
Modulation Scheme
Channel Spacing (MHz)
35E1
16QAM
28 (27.5)
44E1
32QAM
28 (27.5)
53E1
64QAM
28 (27.5)
The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by
the OptiX RTN 600. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
10.5.2 Frequency Band

Different types of ODUs support different frequency bands.
The OptiX OSN equipment supports two types of ODUs, that is, standard power ODU
(SP ODU) and high power ODU (HP ODU). The following three table respectively list
the frequency information on three types of ODUs, that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and
HP ODU.
Table 10-34 Frequency Band (SP ODU)
Frequency
Band
Frequency Range (GHz)
T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz
7.0937.897
154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz
7.7318.496
119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz
10.67511.745
490, 500, 530
13 GHz
12.75113.248
266
15 GHz
14.40315.348
315, 322, 420, 490, 728
18 GHz
17.68519.710
1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz
21.20023.618
1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz
24.54926.453
1008
38 GHz
37.04439.452
1260
Table 10-35 Frequency Band (SPA ODU)

Frequency
Band
T/R Spacing (MHz)
6 GHz
5.8506.425 (L6)
252.04, 300 (L6)
6.4257.125 (U6)
340 (U6)
7.0937.897
154, 161, 168, 196, 245
7 GHz
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 183 of 223

Product Description
Frequency
Band
T/R Spacing (MHz)
8 GHz
8.2798.496
119, 126, 266, 311.32
11 GHz
10.70011.700
490, 500, 530
13 GHz
12.75113.248
266
15 GHz
14.40015.358
420, 490
18 GHz
17.68519.710
1008, 1010
23 GHz
21.20023.618
1008, 1232
Table 10-36 Frequency Band (HP ODU)

Frequency
Band
T/R Spacing (MHz)
7 GHz
7.0937.897
154, 160, 161, 168, 196, 245
8 GHz
7.7318.497
119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266,

311.32
11 GHz
10.67511.745
490, 500, 530
13 GHz
12.75113.248
266
15 GHz
14.40015.358
315, 322, 420, 475, 490, 640, 644,

728
18 GHz
17.68519.710
1008, 1010, 1560
23 GHz
21.20023.618
1008, 1200, 1232
26 GHz
24.25026.453
800, 1008
32 GHz
31.81533.383
812
38 GHz
37.04440.105
700, 1260
10.5.3 Receiver Sensitivity

Different working modes and working frequencies have different receiver sensitivities.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 184 of 223

Product Description
For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value.
As listed in the following three tables, the radio work modes corresponding to the receiver
sensitivity use the microwave frame structure based on TU or STM-1.
Table 10-37 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (i)

Item
Performance
4xE1
8xE1
QPSK
16xE1
16QAM
QPSK
16QAM
QPSK
16QAM
RSL@BER=106 (dBm)
@6GHz
91.5
87.5
88.5
84.5
85.5
81.5
@7GHz
91.5
87.5
88.5
84.5
85.5
81.5
@8GHz
91.5
87.5
88.5
84.5
85.5
81.5
@11GHz
91.0
87.0
88.0
84.0
85.0
81.0
@13GHz
91.0
87.0
88.0
84.0
85.0
81.0
@15GHz
91.0
87.0
88.0
84.0
85.0
81.0
@18GHz
91.0
87.0
88.0
84.0
85.0
81.0
@23GHz
90.5
86.5
87.5
83.5
84.5
80.5
@26GHz
90.0
86.0
87.0
83.0
84.0
80.0
@32GHz
89.0
85.0
86.0
82.0
83.0
79.0
@38GHz
88.5
84.5
85.5
81.5
82.5
78.5
Table 10-38 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (ii)

Item
Performance
22xE1
26xE1
32xE1
35xE1
44xE1
53xE1
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
RSL@BER=10 (dBm)
@6GHz
80.5
76.5
73.0
79.0
77.5
73.5
@7GHz
80.5
76.5
73.0
79.0
77.5
73.5
@8GHz
80.5
76.5
73.0
79.0
77.5
73.5
@11GHz
80.0
76.0
72.5
78.5
77.0
73.0
@13GHz
80.0
76.0
72.5
78.5
77.0
73.0
@15GHz
80.0
76.0
72.5
78.5
77.0
73.0
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 185 of 223

Product Description
Item
Performance
22xE1
26xE1
32xE1
35xE1
44xE1
53xE1
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
@18GHz
80.0
76.0
72.5
78.5
77.0
73.0
@23GHz
79.5
75.5
72.0
78.0
76.5
72.5
@26GHz
79.0
75.0
71.5
77.5
76.0
72.0
@32GHz
78.0
74.0
70.5
76.5
75.0
71.0
@38GHz
77.5
73.5
70.0
76.0
74.5
70.5
Table 10-39 Typical values of the receiver sensitivity (iii)

Item
Performance
STM-1
128QAM
RSL@BER=106 (dBm)
@6GHz
69.5
@7GHz
69.5
@8GHz
69.5
@11GHz
69.0
@13GHz
69.0
@15GHz
69.0
@18GHz
69.0
@23GHz
68.5
@26GHz
68.0
@32GHz
67.0
@38GHz
66.5
10.5.4 Transceiver Performance

Different types of ODUs have different transceiver performances.
The following three table lists the transceiver performances of three types of ODUs,
that is, SP ODU, SPA ODU, and HP ODU.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 186 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-40 Transceiver Performance (SP ODU)

Item
Performance
QPSK
16QAM/32QAM
64QAM/128QAM
Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)

@7GHz
25.5
21.0
15.0
@8GHz
25.5
21.0
15.0
@11GHz
24.5
20
14
@13GHz
24.5
20
14
@15GHz
24.5
20
14
@18GHz
24
20
14
@23GHz
22.5
19
13
@26GHz
22
18
12
@38GHz
20.5
16
10
Nominal
minimum
transmit power
(dBm)
Nominal
20
maximum receive
power (dBm)
Frequency
stability (ppm)
Table 10-41 Transceiver Performance (SPA ODU)

Item
Performance
QPSK
16QAM/32QAM
64QAM/128QAM

@6GHz
26.5
24.0
23.0
@7GHz
25.5
21.5
20.0
@8GHz
25.5
21.5
20.0
@11GHz
24.5
22
18
@13GHz
24.5
20
18
@15GHz
24.5
20
18
@18GHz
22.5
19
17
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 187 of 223

Product Description
Item
Performance
QPSK
16QAM/32QAM
64QAM/128QAM
@23GHz
22.5
19
16
Nominal minimum
transmit power
(dBm)
Nominal
maximum receive
power (dBm)
20
Frequency
stability (ppm)
Table 10-42 Transceiver Performance (HP ODU)

Item
Performance
QPSK
16QAM/32QAM
64QAM/128QAM

@7GHz
30
28
24
@8GHz
30
28
24
@11GHz
28
26
21
@13GHz
26
23
18
@15GHz
26
23
18
@18GHz
25.5
22
17
@23GHz
25
22
17
@26GHz
25
22
17
@32GHz
23
21
16
@38GHz
23
20
16
Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)

@7GHz
@8GHz
@11GHz
@13GHz
@15GHz
@18GHz
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 188 of 223

Product Description
Item
Performance
QPSK
@23GHz
@26GHz
@32GHz
@38GHz
Nominal
maximum receive
power (dBm)
20
Frequency
stability (ppm)
16QAM/32QAM
64QAM/128QAM
10.5.5 Anti-Multipath Fading Performance

The fading performance indicates the capability of the OptiX OSN equipment for
fighting against multipath fading.
Table 10-43 Anti-multipath fading performance
Item
Performance
STM-1/128QAM W-curve
See Figure 10-1.
STM-1/128QAM W-curve
51 dB.
Figure 10-1 W-curve
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 189 of 223

Product Description
10.5.6 IF Performance
The IF performance indicates the performances of the IF signals and ODU O&M
signals.
Table 10-44 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm)
50
ODU O&M signal

Modulation scheme
ASK
Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
5.5
Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)
10
10.5.7 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the
performances of the FEC encoding mode and adaptive time-domain equalizer for
baseband signals.
Table 10-45 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals
Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH signals
Adaptive
time-domain
equalizer for
baseband
signals
Consisting of the 24-tap feed forward equalizer filter and the

3-tap decision feedback equalizer.
10.5.8 Equipment Reliability

The 1+0 non-protection configuration and 1+1 protection configuration have different
link reliabilities.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 190 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-46 Link reliability per hop

Item
Performance
1+0 Non-protection
Configuration
1+1 Protection Configuration
MTBF (h)
14.71x104
71.43x104
MTTR (h)
Availability
99.99932%
99.99986%
10.6 Safety Certification

The OptiX OSN 7500 has received several safety certifications.
Table 10-47 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received.
Table 10-47 Safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 7500 has received
Item
Standard
EMC
CISPR22 Class A
CISPR24
EN55022 Class A
EN50024
ETSI EN 300 386 Class A
ETSI ES 201 468
CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class A
ICES 003 Class A
AS/NZS CISPR22 Class A
GB9254 Class A
VCCI Class A
Safety
IEC 60950-1
IEC/EN41003
EN 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2 No 60950-1
AS/NZS 60950-1
BS EN 60950-1
IS 13252
GB4943
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 191 of 223

Product Description
Item
Standard
Laser safety
FDA rules
21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11
IEC60825-1
IEC60825-2
EN60825-1
EN60825-2
GB7247
Health
ICNIRP Guideline
1999-519-EC
EN 50385
OET Bulletin 65
IEEE Std C95.1
Environment protection
RoHS
10.7 Environmental Conditions

The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a different environment during storage, transportation,
and operation. This topic lists the environmental conditions.
The following international standards are used as the reference for specifying the
environmental conditions:
l
ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly

temperature-controlled location
NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS)

Requirements: Physical Protection
10.7.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
10.7.3 Environment for Operation
The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
10.7.1 Environment for Storage

The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for storage.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-48 lists the climatic conditions for storage.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 192 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-48 Climatic conditions for storage

Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature
40
to +70
Rate of change of temperature
/min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
Movement of surrounding air
30 m/s
Waterproof Requirements
Generally, the equipment on the customer site must be stored indoors.
There should be no water on the floor or water entering the equipment cartons. The
equipment should be placed away from places where there are possibilities of water
leakage such as near the auto fire-fighting facilities and heating facilities.
If the equipment is stored outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
l
The cartons must be intact.
Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
There should be no water on the ground where the cartons are placed.
The cartons must be free from direct exposure to sunlight.
Biological Conditions
l
Prevent the growth of microbes such as mould and fungus.
Prevent the presence of rodents and other animals.
Air Cleanness
l
The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive, or

corrosive dust.
The density of the mechanically active substances must meet the requirements
specified in Table 10-49.
Table 10-49 Requirements for the density of the mechanically active substances during
storage
Mechanically Active Substance
Content
Dust (suspension)
5.00 mg/m3
Dust (sedimentation)
20.0 mg/m2h
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 193 of 223

Product Description
Content
Sand
300 mg/m3
The density of the chemically active substances must meet the requirements
Table 10-50 Requirements for the density of the chemically active substances during
storage
Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
0.30 mg/m3
H2S
0.10 mg/m3
NO2
0.50 mg/m3
NH3
1.00 mg/m3
Cl2
0.10 mg/m3
HCl
0.10 mg/m3
HF
0.01 mg/m3
O3
0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-51 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.
Table 10-51 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random
vibration
Acceleration
spectral density
0.02 m2/s3
Frequency
5 Hz to 20
Hz
10 Hz to 50
Hz
50 Hz to
100 Hz
dB/oct
+12
-12
10.7.2 Environment for Transportation

The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for transportation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-52 lists the climatic conditions for transportation.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 194 of 223

Product Description
Table 10-52 Climatic conditions for transportation

Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
Air temperature
40
1 /min
Relative humidity
5% to 100%
Solar radiation
1120 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
30 m/s
to +70
Waterproof Requirements
Ensure that the following conditions are met when transporting the equipment:
l
The cartons must be intact.
Take rainproof measures to prevent water from entering the cartons.
There should be no water in the transportation tool.
l
Air Cleanness
l

corrosive dust.
transportation
Content
Dust (suspension)
No requirement
3.0 mg/m2h
Sand
100 mg/m3
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 195 of 223

Product Description
transportation
Chemically Active Substance
Content
SO2
1.00 mg/m3
H2S
0.50 mg/m3
NO2
1.00 mg/m3
NH3
3.00 mg/m3
Cl2
HCl
0.50 mg/m3
HF
0.03 mg/m3
O3
0.10 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-55 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during transportation.
Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Random
vibration
Acceleration spectral
density
1 m2/s3
3 dBA
Frequency range
5 Hz to 20 Hz
20 Hz to 200 Hz
Response spectrum I
(sample weight > 50 kg)
100 m/s2, 11 ms, 100 times on each

surface
Response spectrum II
(sample weight 50 kg)
180 m/s2, 6 ms, 100 times on each

surface
Weight (kg)
< 10
Height (m)
1.0
Weight (kg)
< 15
Height (m)
1.0
Weight (kg)
< 20
Height (m)
0.8
Weight (kg)
< 30
Height (m)
0.6
Weight (kg)
< 40
Height (m)
0.5
Weight (kg)
< 50
Shock
Fall-off
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 196 of 223

Product Description
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Height (m)
0.4
Weight (kg)
< 100
Height (m)
0.3
Weight (kg)
> 100
Height (m)
0.1
NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
10.7.3 Environment for Operation

The OptiX OSN 7500 requires a proper environment for operation.
Climatic Conditions
Table 10-56 and Table 10-57 list the climatic conditions when the OptiX OSN 7500
operates.
Table 10-56 Requirements for temperature and humidity
Temperature
Relative Humidity
Long-term
working
conditions
Short-term working
conditions
Long-term
working
conditions
Short-term working
conditions
10% to 90%
5% to 95%
to 45
to +55
NOTE
The temperature and humidity values are tested in a place that is 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4
m in front of the equipment. Short-term working conditions mean that the continuous working
time of the equipment does not exceed 96 hours, and that the accumulated working time every
year does not exceed 15 days.
Table 10-57 Other climatic conditions

Item
Range
Altitude
4000 m
Air pressure
70 kPa to 106 kPa
30 /h
Solar radiation
700 W/s2
Heat radiation
600 W/s2
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 197 of 223

Product Description
Item
Range
5 m/s
l
Air Cleanness
l

corrosive dust.
operation
Mechanically Active
Substance
Content
Dust particle
3 x 105 particles/m 3
Dust (suspension)
0.2 mg/m3
1.5 mg/m2h
Sand
20 mg/m3
operation
Chemically Active
Substance
Content
SO2
0.30 mg/m3
H2S
0.10 mg/m3
NH3
1.00 mg/m3
Cl2
0.10 mg/m3
HCl
0.10 mg/m3
HF
0.01 mg/m3
O3
0.05 mg/m3
NOX
0.50 mg/m3
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 198 of 223

Product Description
Mechanical Stress
Table 10-60 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during operation.
Table 10-60 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation
Item
Sub-Item
Range
Sinusoidal
vibration
Velocity
5 mm/s
Acceleration
2 m/s2
Frequency range
5 Hz to 62 Hz
62 Hz to 200 Hz
Shock response
spectrum II
Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, three times

on each surface
Static load
0 kPa
Shock
NOTE
The shock response spectrum is the maximum acceleration response curve generated by the
equipment that is spurred by a specified shock. Static load is the pressure from the top, which
the equipment with the package can endure when the equipment is placed in a specific manner.
10.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Each Board

Different boards have different power consumption and weight.
Table 10-61 lists the power consumption and weight of each board.
Table 10-61 Power consumption and weight of each board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
T2SL64
30
1.1
T2SL64A
40
1.1
N1SL64
22
1.1
N1SLD64
41
1.2
N1SF64
23
1.1
N1SF16
26
1.1
N1SF64A
33
1.1
N1SL16A
and
N2SL16A
20
1.1
N3SL16
22
1.1
N1SLQ16
21
0.9
N2SLQ16
38
1.3
N1SL4A
17
1.0
N1SL16
and
N2SL16
20
1.1
N1SLD4A
17
1.0
Board
SDH boards
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 199 of 223

Product Description
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
N1SLO16
38
1.0
N1SLQ4A
17
1.0
N1SL4 and
N2SL4
15
1.0
N1SL1A
17
1.0
N1SLD4
and
N2SLD4
15
1.0
N1SLN
12
0.6
N1SLQ4
and
N2SLQ4
16
1.0
N3SLD41
13
0.6
N1SL1 and
N2SL1
14
1.0
N3SLQ41
14
0.6
N1SLQ1
and
N2SLQ1
15
1.0
N1SLQ1A
17
1.0
N2SLO1
26
1.1
N1SLT1
15
1.2
N3SLO1
24
1.2
N3SLT1
25
1.3
N1SLH1
22
1.0
N1SEP1
and
N1SEP
17
1.0
N1SLH1A
21
1.0
N1RPC01
110
4.0
N1RPC02
70
4.2
N1PD3
19
1.1
N2PQ3
13
0.9
N2PD3
12
0.9
N1PQ1
19
1.0
N1PL3 and
N1PL3A
15
1.0
N2PQ1
13
1.0
N2PL3 and
N2PL3A
12
0.9
N1PQM
22
1.0
N2SPQ4
24
0.9
N1PQMA
21
1.0
N1DX1
15 (before the
tributary
protection
switching
(TPS)); 31 (after
the TPS)
1.0
N1DXA
10
0.8
0 (before the
0.3
PDH boards
Interface boards and switching and bridging boards

N1MU04
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
0.4
N1C34S
Page 200 of 223

Product Description
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
TPS); 2 (after the

TPS)
N1EU08
11
0.4
N1D12B
0.3
N1OU08
and
N2OU08
0.4
N1D12S
0 (before the
TPS); 9 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1D34S
0 (before the
TPS); 2 (after
the TPS)
0.4
N1D75S
0 (before the
TPS); 6 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1TSB8
0 (before the
TPS); 5 (after
the TPS)
0.3
N1DM12
0 (before the
TPS); 8 (after the
TPS)
0.5
N1ETF8
0.4
N1ETS8
0 (before the
TPS); 3 (after the
TPS)
0.4
N1EFF8
0.4
N1EAS2
70
1.2
N1ADL4
41
0.9
N1EFS4
30
1.0
N1ADQ1
41
1.0
N3EFS4
22
1.1
N1IDL4
41
1.0
N1EMS2
40 (with the
electrical
interface board);
54 (with the
optical interface
board)
0.8
N1EMS4
65 (with the
electrical
interface board);
75 (with the
optical interface
board)
1.1
N2EGS2
43
1.0
N1IDQ1
41
1.0
N3EGS2
25
1.0
N1MST4
26
0.9
N1EGT2
29
0.9
N2EGT2
15
0.9
N1EGS4
and
N3EGS4
70
1.1
N1EFT8
and
N1EFT8A
22
1.0
N4EGS4
43
0.7
N2EFS0
and
N4EFS0
35
1.0
N2EGR2
40
1.1
N1EFS0A
33 (with the
electrical
interface board);
44 (with the
1.1
Data boards
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 201 of 223

Product Description
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weig
ht
(kg)
Board
Power
Consumption
(W)
Weight
(kg)
optical interface
board)
N2EMR0
50
1.2
N5EFS0
26 (with the
electrical
interface board);
32 (with the
optical interface
board)
0.6
Cross-connect boards and system control boards

N2GSCC
and
N3GSCC
20
0.9
T1SXCSA
96
2.2
N4GSCC
19
1.0
T2UXCSA
69
2.1
N5GSCC
10
0.9
T1IXCSA
140
2.4
T1GXCSA
41
1.8
T1EXCSA
53
1.9
Other boards
TN11MR2
0.2
0.9
BA2
20
1.0
TN11MR4
0.2
0.9
N1BPA
20
1.0
N1MR2A
1.0
N2BPA
11
1.2
N1MR2C
1.0
61COA
and
N1COA
10
3.5
TN11CMR
2
0.2
0.8
62COA
75
TN11CMR
4
0.2
0.9
T1AUX
0.4
TN11OBU
1
16
1.3
N1FANA
19
1.5
N1LWX
30
1.1
T1PIU
1.3
N1IFSD1
27
1.1
N1RPWR
45
1.4
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 202 of 223

Product Description
11
Compliant Standards
11.1 ITU-T Recommendations

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ITU-T recommendations.
Table 11-1 ITU-T recommendations
Recommendation
Description
G.652
Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable
G.655
Characteristics of a non-zero dispersion-shifted

single-mode optical fiber and cable
G.661
Definition and test methods for the relevant generic

parameters of optical fiber amplifiers
G.662
Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices

and sub-systems
G.663
Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices

and sub-systems
G.671
Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
G.691
Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other

SDH systems with optical amplifiers
G.692
Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical

amplifiers
G.694.1
Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency

grid
G.694.2
Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength

grid
G.702
Digital hierarchy bit rates
G.703
Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital

interfaces
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 203 of 223

Product Description
Recommendation
Description
G.704
Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312, 2048,

8448 and 44736kbit/s hierarchical levels
G.7041
Generic framing procedure (GFP)
G.7042
Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)
G.707
Network node interface for the synchronous digital

hierarchy (SDH)
G.709
Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
G.773
Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of

transmission systems
G.774 1-5
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management

information model for the network element view
G.775
Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS)

defect detection and clearance criteria
G.783
Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks
G.784
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
G.803
Architectures of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.811
Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
G.812
Timing requirements of slave clocks suitable for use as

node clocks in synchronization networks
G.813
Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks

(SEC)
G.823
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks

which are based on the 2048kbit/s hierarchy
G.824

which are based on the 1544kbit/s hierarchy
G.825

which are based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
(SDH)
G.826
Error performance parameters and objectives for

international, constant bit rate digital paths at or above the
primary rate
G.831
Management capabilities of transport networks based on

the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
G.841
Types and characteristics of SDH network protection

architectures
G.842
Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 204 of 223

Product Description
Recommendation
Description
G.957
Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to

the synchronous digital hierarchy
G.958
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital

hierarchy for use on optical fiber cables
I.121
Broadband aspects of ISDN
I.150
B-ISDN asynchronous transfer mode functional

characteristics
I.311
B-ISDN general network aspects
I.321
B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and

functions
I.361
B-ISDN ATM layer specification
I.630
ATM protection switching
M.3010
Principles for a telecommunication management network
Q.811
Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
Q.812
Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface
V.24
List of definitions for interchange circuits between data

terminal equipment (DTE) and data circuit-terminating
equipment (DCE)
V.35
Data transmission at 48 kilobits per second using 60-108

kHz group band circuits
V.28
Electrical characteristics for unbalanced double-current

interchange circuits
X.21
Use on public data networks of Data Terminal Equipment

(DTE) which is designed for interfacing to synchronous
V-Series modems
X.86
Ethernet over LAPS
11.2 IEEE Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IEEE standards.
Table 11-2 IEEE standards
Standard
Description
IEEE 802.17
Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer

specifications
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 205 of 223

Product Description
Standard
Description
IEEE 802.1ad
Virtual bridged local area networks Amendment 4: Provider

bridges
IEEE 802.1ag
Connectivity fault management
IEEE 802.1d
Media access control (MAC) bridges
IEEE 802.1q
Virtual bridged local area networks
IEEE 802.3
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specification
IEEE 802.3ad
Aggregation of multiple link segments
IEEE 802.3ae
Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer, and

management parameters for 10 Gb/s operation
IEEE 802.3ah
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection

(CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications
IEEE 802.3u
Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer,

medium attachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation,
type 100Base-T
IEEE 802.3x
Standards for local and metropolitan area networks:

specification for 802.3 full duplex operation
IEEE 802.3z
Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical layer,

repeater and management parameters for 1000 Mb/s
operation
IEEE 1588
Defines precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and

control systems implemented with technologies
11.3 IETF Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the IETF standards.
Table 11-3 IETF standards
Standard
Description
RFC 2615 (1999)
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) over SONET/SDH
RFC 1662 (1994)
PPP in HDLC-like Framing
RFC 1661 (1994)
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RFC 1990
The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP)
RFC 2514
Definitions of textual conventions and

OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 206 of 223

Product Description
Standard
Description
RFC 3031
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Architecture
RFC 3032
MPLS Label Stack Encoding
11.4 ANSI Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ANSI related standards.
Table 11-4 ANSI related standards
Standard
Description
ANSI X3.296
SBCON (ESCON): FICON
ANSI X3.230
Fiber channel - physical and signaling interface (FC-PH)
11.5 Environment Related Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the environment related standards.
Table 11-5 Environment related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 60068-2
Basic environmental testing procedures
IEC 60068-3-3
Environmental testing - Part 3: Background information Subpart 3: Guidance. Seismic test methods for equipments
IEC 60721-2-6
Environmental conditions appearing in nature - Earthquake

vibration
IEC 60721-3-1
Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:

Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 1: Storage
IEC 60721-3-3
Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3:

Classification of groups of environmental parameters and
their severities - Section 3: Stationary use at
weatherprotected locations
ETS 300 019-1-1
Weatherprotected, not temperature-controlled storage

locations
ETS 300 019-1-3
Partly temperature-controlled location
NEBS
GR-63-CORE
Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements:

Physical protection
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 207 of 223

Product Description
11.6 EMC Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the EMC related standards.
Table 11-6 EMC related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility-Part4-2: Testing and

measurement techniques-Electrostatic discharge immunity
test
EN 61000-4-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-3: Testing and

measurement techniques-Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-3

measurement techniques-Electrical fast transient/burst
immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-4

measurement techniques-Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-5

measurement techniques-Immunity to conducted
disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-6
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)-Part 4-29: Testing

and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot
interruptions and voltage variations on d.c. input power
port immunity tests
IEC 61000-4-29
EN 61000-4-29
CISPR 22/EN 55022
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance

characteristics-Limits and methods of measurement
CISPR 24/EN 55024
Information technology equipment-immunity

charateristics-Limits and methods of measurement
ETSI EN 300386
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Telecommunication network equipment;
ElectroMagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
ETSI EN 201468
Elecromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters

(ERM); Additional electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
telecommunications equipment for enhanced availability of
service in specific applications
ETSI EN 300132-2
Power supply interface at the input totelecommunications

equipment; Part 2: Operated by direct current (dc)
11.7 Safety Compliance Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the safety compliance related standards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 208 of 223

Product Description
Table 11-7 Safety compliance related standards

Standard
Description
EN 60950
Information technology equipment - safety
IEC 950
Safety of information technology equipment including

electrical business equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 1-M94
Audio, video and similar electronic equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2
No 950-95
Safety of information technology equipment
73/23/EEC
Low voltage directive
UL 60950-1
Safety of information technology equipment
IEC 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
11.8 Protection Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the protection related standards.
Table 11-8 Protection related standards
Standard
Description
IEC 61024-1
Protection of structures against lightning
IEC 61312-1
Protection against lightning electromagnetic impulse part I:

general principles
IEC 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part 4: Testing and

measurement techniques - Section 5: Surge immunity test
ITU-T K.11
Principles of protection against overvoltage and overcurrents
ITU-T K.20
Resistibility of telecommunication switching equipment to

overvoltages and overcurrents
ITU-T K.27
Bonding configurations and earthing inside a

telecommunication building
ITU-T K.41
Resistibility of internal interfaces of telecommunication

centres to surge overvoltages
11.9 ASON Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the ASON related standards.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 209 of 223

Product Description
Table 11-9 ASON related standards

Standard
Description
G.807
Requirements for automatic switched transport networks

(ASTN)
G.8080
Architecture for the automatically switched optical network

(ASON)
G.7712
Architecture and specification of data communication network
G.7713
Distributed call and connection management (DCM) based on

PNNI
G.7714
Protocol for automatic discovery in SDH and OTN networks
G.7715
ASON routing architecture and requirements for link state

protocols
G.7716
Control plane initial establishment, reconfiguration and

recovery
G.7717
Connection admission control
G.7718
Framework for ASON management
RFC 3471
(GMPLS)
Signaling functional description
11.10 Microwave Standards

The OptiX OSN 7500 complies with the microwave related standards.
Table 11-10 Microwave related standards
Standard
Description
ITU-R F.384-7
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high

capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the
upper 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.383-6
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity

radio-relay systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band
ITU-R F.385-8
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless

systems operating in the 7 GHz band
ITU-R F.386-6
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high

capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the
8 GHz band
ITU-R F.387-9
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems

operating in the 11 GHz band
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 210 of 223

Product Description
Standard
Description
ITU-R F.497-6

operating in the 13 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.636-3

ITU-R F.595-8
Radio-frequency channel arrangements for fixed wireless

systems operating in the 18 GHz frequency band
ITU-R F.637-3

ITU-R F.748-3

operating in the 25, 26 and 28 GHz bands
ITU-R F.749-2
Radio-frequency arrangements for systems of the fixed service

ITU-R F.1191-1
1
Bandwidths and unwanted emissions of digital radio-relay

systems
ITU-R
SM.329-10
Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain
ETSI EN 302
217-1 V1.1.4
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements for

point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 1: Overview and
system-independent common characteristics
ETSI EN 302
217-2-1 V1.1.3

point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-1:
System-dependent requirements for digital systems operating in
frequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-2-2 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements

forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized
EN covering essential requirements of Article 3.2 of R&TTE
Directive for digital systems operating in frequency bands where
frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-3 V1.1.3
Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics and requirements

forpoint-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 3: Harmonized
Directive for equipment operating in frequency bands where no
frequency co-ordination is applied
ETSI EN 302
217-4-1 V1.1.3

point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-1:
System-dependent requirements for antennas
ETSI EN 302
217-4-2 V1.2.1

point-to-point equipment and antennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized
Directive for antennas
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 211 of 223

Product Description
Standard
Description
ETSI EN 301
126-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 1:

Point-to-Point equipment - Definitions, general requirements and
test procedures
ETSI EN 301
126-3-1 V1.1.2
Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing; Part 3-1:

Point-to-Point antennas; Definitions, general requirements and
test procedures
ETSI EN 301
390 V1.2.1
Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point and Multipoint Systems;

Spurious emissions and receiver immunity limits
atequipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems
iec
60153-2-1974
Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for

ordinary rectangular waveguides
iec
60154-2-1980
Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevant specifications for

flanges for ordinary rectangular waveguides
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 212 of 223

Product Description
12
Glossary
This chapter lists the glossary used in this manual.

1+1 protection
A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one

working SNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent
bridge.
1:N protection
A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N

working SNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have
one extra traffic signal.
10BASE-T
10Base-T is a transmission medium specified by IEEE 802.3i

that carries information at rates up to 10Mbps in baseband form
using unshielded twisted pair (UTP) conductors with low cost
Level 3 or better UTP wiring up to 100 meters (328 ft.). 10BaseT
uses RJ45 connectors and sometimes 50-pin AMP connectors
to a patch panel.
100BASE-T
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s

CSMA/CD local area network.
100Base-TX
IEEE 802.3 Physical Layer specification for a 100 Mb/s

CSMA/CD local area network over two pairs of Category 5
unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or shielded twisted-pair (STP)
wire.
3R
Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.
A
ADM
A communications device that multiplexes (combines) several

signals for transmission over a single medium. A demultiplexor
completes the process by separating multiplexed signals from a
transmission line.Frequently a multiplexor and demultiplexor are
combined into a single device capable of processing both
outgoing and incoming signals.
Alarm
A means of alerting the operator that a specified abnormal

condition exists.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 213 of 223

Product Description
ALS
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output

power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid
exposure to hazardous levels.
ATM
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is a high-performance,

cell-oriented switching and multiplexing technology that utilizes
fixed-length packets to carry different types of traffic. ATM is a
technology that will enable carriers to capitalize on a number of
revenue opportunities through multiple ATM classes of services;
high-speed local-area network (LAN) interconnection; voice,
video, and future multimedia applications in business markets in
the short term; and in community and residential markets in the
longer term..
B
Bandwidth
The range of frequencies a circuit will respond to or pass

through. It may also be the difference between the highest and
lowest frequencies of a signal.
C
Concatenation
The process of summing the bandwidth of a number of smaller

containers into a larger bandwidth container. Two versions exist:
contiguous concatenation and virtual concatenation.
Control plane
The control plane performs the call control and connection

control functions. Through signalling, the control plane sets up
and releases connections, and may restore a connection in case
of a failure. The control plane also performs other functions in
support of call and connection control, such as routing
information dissemination.
CoS
Characteristics of a service such as described by service

identity, virtual network, link capability requirements, QoS and
traffic threshold parameters.
D
DNI
DNI provides an alternative physical interconnection point,

between the rings, in case of an interconnection failure scenario.
E
Encapsulation
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
The technique used by layered protocols in which a layer adds

header information to the protocol data unit (PDU) from the layer
above. As an example, in Internet terminology, a packet would
contain a header from the physical layer, followed by a header
from the network layer (IP), followed by a header from the
transport layer (TCP), followed by the application protocol data.
Page 214 of 223

Product Description
EPL
A point-to-point interconnection between two UNIs without SDH

bandwidth sharing. Transport bandwidth is never shared
between different customers.
Ethernet
The IEEE 802.3 standard for contention networks. Ethernet

uses a bus or star topology and relies on the form of access
known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision
Detection (CSMA/CD) to regulate communication line traffic.
Network nodes are linked by coaxial cable, by fiber-optic cable,
or by twisted-pair wiring. Data is transmitted in variable-length
frames containing delivery and control information and up to
1,500 bytes of data. The Ethernet standard provides for
baseband transmission at 10 megabits (10 million bits) per
second and is available in various forms, including those known
as Thin Ethernet, Thick Ethernet, 10Base2, 10Base5, 10BaseF,
and 10BaseT. The IEEE standard dubbed 802.3z, or Gigabit
Ethernet, operates at 10 times 100 Mbps speed.
ETSI
ETSI standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body

responsible for GSM.
EVPL
A service that is both a line service and a virtual private service.
Extra traffic
The traffic that is carried over the protection channels when that
capacity is not used for the protection of working traffic. Extra
traffic is not protected.
F
Fairness
algorithm
To ensure that all the stations can share the bandwidth fairly in
the event of congestion or overload, RPR presents a special fair
algorithm for fair bandwidth sharing and allocation.
FEC
forward error correction (FEC) is a system of error control for

data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant data to
its messages, which allows the receiver to detect and correct
errors (within some bound) without the need to ask the sender
for additional data. The advantage of forward error correction is
that retransmission of data can often be avoided, at the cost of
higher bandwidth requirements on average, and is therefore
applied in situations where retransmissions are relatively costly
or impossible.
Fiber jumper
Fiber that is used for connections between the subrack and the
ODF, and for connections between subracks or inside a
subrack.
Forced switch
An action when the network operator forces the network to use

the protection resources instead of the working resources, or
vice-versa, regardless of the state of the resources.
Frame
In data transmission, the sequence of contiguous bits delimited

by, and including, beginning and ending flag sequences.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 215 of 223

Product Description
I
IMA
Short for inverse multiplexing over ATM. IMA is a physical layer

technology in which a high-speed stream of ATM cells is broken
up and transmitted across multiple T1/E1 links, then is
reconstructed back into the original ATM cell order at the
destination. IMA is first standardized (v1.0) by the ATM Forum
in1997, and updated (v1.1) in 1999.
IMA group
IMA group refers to physical links grouped to form a

higher-bandwidth logical link, whose rate is approximately the
sum of the individual link rates.
Intelligent
Network
Service
An Intelligent Network service is a sophisticated

telecommunication service. Its creation and its operation are
facilitated by telecommunication network architecture, based on
Intelligent Network (IN) concept.
J
Jitter
The variation in the time taken for packets to be delivered to an

endpoint or network entity.
L
Loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to

its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for
errors.
M
Manual
Switching
When the protection path is normal and there is no request of a

higher level switching, the service is manually switched from the
working path to the protection path, to test whether the network
still has the protection capability.
Map
A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into Virtual

Containers at the boundary of an SDH network.
MSP
The function performed to provide capability for switching a

signal between and including two MST functions, from a
"working" to a "protection" channel.
Multiplexer
An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels

onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the
relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being
fixed.
O
ODU
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
The ODU is the outdoor part of the OptiX RTN 600 system. It
performs frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Page 216 of 223

Product Description
Optical
Amplifier
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified

by means of the stimulated emission taking place in an suitable
active medium.
Orderwire
Orderwire is able to provide voice communication for operators

or maintenance engineers at different workstation.
P
Paired slots
A pair of slots whose overhead can be processed by the bus on

the backplane. For the two boards in the paired slots, the
inter-board cross-connection can be directly configured, and the
cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the
cross-connect board.
R
Ring network
A ring network is a network topology in which each node

connects to exactly two other nodes, forming a circular pathway
for signals.
RPR
Resilient packet ring (RPR) technology is optimized for robust

and efficient packet networking over a fiber ring topology. It has
resilient mechanisms such as dynamic bandwidth allocation
through fairness algorithm, space multiplexing, and wrap
protection. RPR nodes are connected in a ring topology by two
fibers, each transmitting in the opposite direction. RPR networks
delivers data, voice, and video services through packets.
S
SNCP
A working subnetwork connection is replaced by a protection

subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection
fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
SLA
The contract between a service provider and the customer that

specifies the level of service that will be provided.
T
TCM
A method used to monitor bit errors. If a VC-4 passes through

several networks, the bit errors of each section can be
monitored through TCM.
TCP/IP
A suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on

the Internet. TCP/IP uses several protocols, the two main ones
being TCP and IP.
Timeslot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which

two devices are able to interconnect.
TPS
In the optical transmission system, tributary protection switching

(TPS) refers to the protection switching of tributary signals.
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 217 of 223

Product Description
Transport plane The transport plane provides bidirectional or unidirectional

transfer of user information, from one location to another. It can
also provide transfer of some control and network management
information. The transport plane is layered; it is equivalent to the
transport network defined in ITU-T Rec. G.805.
V
VC
Virtual concatenation is the primary enhancement to voice

optimized SONET, in order to support the transport of variable
bit data streams.
W
WTR
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
A period of time that must elapse before a - from a fault

recovered - trail/connection can be used again to transport the
normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal
from.
Page 218 of 223

Product Description
13
Acronyms and Abbreviations
This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.
A
ABR
Available Bit Rate
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ASON
Automatically Switched Optical Network
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
B
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply System
BPA
Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit
C
CAR
Committed Access Rate
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CC
Continuity Check
CF
Compact Flash
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
CR-LDP
Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol
CSPF
Constrained Shortest Path First
D
DCC
Data Communication Channels
DCE
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DDN
Digital Data Network
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 219 of 223

Product Description
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPL
Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN
Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON
Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL
Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN
Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC
Fiber Channel
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FICON
Fiber Connection
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GMPLS
General Multiprotocol Label Switching
H
HDB3
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
I
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 220 of 223

Product Description
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector
L
LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN
Local Area Network; Local Area Network
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB
Loopback
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
LPT
Link State Path Through
LSP
Label Switch Path
M
MAC
Media Access Control
MADM
Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer
MCF
Message Communication Function
MLM
Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
MPLS
Multiprotocol Label Switching
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
N
NEBS
Network Equipment-Building System
nrt-VBR
Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate
NS
Network Side
NSF
Non-interrupted Service Forwarding
O
OADM
Optical Add/drop Multiplexer
OAM
Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAM&P
Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OSP
OptiX Software Platform
OTM
Optical Terminal Multiplexer
P
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PE
Provider Edge
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Page 221 of 223

Product Description
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
Q
QoS
Quality of Service
R
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring
RSTP
Rapid Span Tree Protocol
rt-VBR
Real Time Variable Bite rate
RSVP-TE
Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-Engineering

Extensions
S
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP
Small Form Pluggable
SLA
Service Level Agreement
SLM
Single-Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
SNCMP
Subnetwork Connection Multi-protection
SNCTP
Subnetwork Connection Tunnel Protection
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
T
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitoring
TPS
Tributary Protection Switching
U
UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
UPM
Uninterrupted Power Modules
V
VC
Virtual Channel
VCC
Virtual Channel Connection
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
VP
Virtual Path
VPC
Virtual Path Connection
VPN
Virtual Private Network
W
WDM
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Page 222 of 223

Product Description
WTR
Issue 01 (2009-01-10)
Wait-to-Restore
Page 223 of 223

Product Description: Optix Osn 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Description: Optix Osn 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Product Description

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

About This Document

Describes the OptiX OSN 7500 and its position in the

This chapter generally describes the features of the

Describes the mechanical structure and the

Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN

Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of

This chapter introduces the ASON features of the

Describes protection modes (including equipment

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

This chapter describes main technical characteristics

This chapter describes main technical characteristics

This chapter describes the hardware dimension,

10.8 Power Consumption

This appendix lists the power consumption and

This appendix lists international standards to which

This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

The appendix lists the acronyms and abbreviations

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

4 Software Architecture .................................................................................................. 65

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

6 ASON Features ........................................................................................................... 104

7 Protection ................................................................................................................... 132

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

9 Security Management ................................................................................................ 155

10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 159

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

11 Compliant Standards ............................................................................................... 203

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

Storage area network (SAN)

Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

Digital data network (DDN)

Automatically switched optical network (ASON)

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500.

PDF created with FinePrint pdfFactory Pro trial version http://www.pdffactory.com

OptiX OSN 7500 Intelligent Optical Switching System V100R009

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 9500

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500T

OptiX OSN 3500 II